Search Results

Search found 40730 results on 1630 pages for 'type erasure'.

Page 448/1630 | < Previous Page | 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455  | Next Page >

• IIS 7.5 , Tomcat 7 - Isapi redirector - Fail Over - sticky sessions

  - by Jose Matias

  I have two instances of Tomcat 7.0.8 running in the same machine (Tomcat7A and Tomcat7B) and IIS 7.5 acting as front-end load-balancer with isapi-redirector 1.2.31, running on Windows 2008 R2. When i disconnect the instance wich is handling a request i can see a new instance being assigned with the same sessionid but then the user is redirected to the login page. server.xml configuration file <Engine name="Catalina" defaultHost="localhost" jvmRoute="Tomcat7A"> <Realm className="org.apache.catalina.realm.LockOutRealm"> <Realm className="org.apache.catalina.realm.UserDatabaseRealm" resourceName="UserDatabase"/> </Realm> <Host name="localhost" appBase="webapps" unpackWARs="true" autoDeploy="true"> <Cluster className="org.apache.catalina.ha.tcp.SimpleTcpCluster" channelSendOptions="8"> <Manager className="org.apache.catalina.ha.session.DeltaManager" expireSessionsOnShutdown="false" notifyListenersOnReplication="true"/> <Channel className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.group.GroupChannel"> <Membership className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.membership.McastService" address="228.0.0.8" bind="7.3.1.22" port="45564" frequency="500" dropTime="3000"/> <Receiver className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.transport.nio.NioReceiver" address="auto" port="4200" autoBind="100" selectorTimeout="5000" maxThreads="6"/> <Sender className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.transport.ReplicationTransmitter"> <Transport className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.transport.nio.PooledParallelSender"/> </Sender> <Interceptor className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.group.interceptors.TcpFailureDetector"/> <Interceptor className="org.apache.catalina.tribes.group.interceptors.MessageDispatch15Interceptor"/> </Channel> <Valve className="org.apache.catalina.ha.tcp.ReplicationValve" filter=".*\.gif;.*\.js;.*\.jpg;.*\.htm;.*\.html;.*\.txt"/> <Valve className="org.apache.catalina.ha.session.JvmRouteBinderValve"/> <ClusterListener className="org.apache.catalina.ha.session.JvmRouteSessionIDBinderListener"/> <ClusterListener className="org.apache.catalina.ha.session.ClusterSessionListener"/> </Cluster> <Valve className="org.apache.catalina.valves.AccessLogValve" directory="logs" prefix="localhost_access_log." suffix=".txt" pattern="%h %l %u %t &quot;%r&quot; %s %b" resolveHosts="false"/> </Host> </Engine> worker_mount_file=C:\tomcat\iis\conf\uriworkermap_prod.properties worker.list = balancer,status worker.Tomcat7B.host = 7.3.1.22 worker.Tomcat7B.type = ajp13 worker.Tomcat7B.port = 8010 worker.Tomcat7B.lbfactor = 10 worker.Tomcat7A.host = 7.3.1.22 worker.Tomcat7A.type = ajp13 worker.Tomcat7A.port = 8009 worker.Tomcat7A.lbfactor = 10 worker.balancer.type = lb worker.balancer.sticky_session = 1 worker.balancer.balance_workers = Tomcat7B, Tomcat7A worker.status.type = status isapi_redirect log [debug] wc_get_worker_for_name::jk_worker.c (116): found a worker balancer [debug] HttpExtensionProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2188): got a worker for name balancer [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1118): service sticky_session=1 id='89569C584CC4F58740D649C4BE655D36.Tomcat7B' [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (946): searching worker for partial sessionid 89569C584CC4F58740D649C4BE655D36.Tomcat7B [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (954): searching worker for session route Tomcat7B [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (968): found worker Tomcat7B (Tomcat7B) for route Tomcat7B and partial sessionid 89569C584CC4F58740D649C4BE655D36.Tomcat7B [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1161): service worker=Tomcat7B route=Tomcat7B [debug] ajp_get_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (3096): acquired connection pool slot=0 after 0 retries [debug] ajp_marshal_into_msgb::jk_ajp_common.c (605): ajp marshaling done [debug] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2379): processing Tomcat7B with 2 retries [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (726): About to shutdown socket 820 [7.3.1.22:24482 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (797): shutting down the read side of socket 820 [7.3.1.22:24482 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (808): Shutdown socket 820 [7.3.1.22:24482 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] and read 0 lingering bytes in 0 sec. [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1496): (Tomcat7B) failed sending request, socket 820 is not connected any more (errno=-10000) [debug] ajp_next_connection::jk_ajp_common.c (823): (Tomcat7B) Will try pooled connection socket 896 from slot 1 [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (726): About to shutdown socket 896 [7.3.1.22:24488 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (797): shutting down the read side of socket 896 [7.3.1.22:24488 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] [debug] jk_shutdown_socket::jk_connect.c (808): Shutdown socket 896 [7.3.1.22:24488 -> 7.3.1.22:8010] and read 0 lingering bytes in 0 sec. [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1496): (Tomcat7B) failed sending request, socket 896 is not connected any more (errno=-10000) [info] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1567): (Tomcat7B) all endpoints are disconnected, detected by connect check (2), cping (0), send (0) [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (484): socket TCP_NODELAY set to On [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (608): trying to connect socket 896 to 7.3.1.22:8010 [info] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (626): connect to 7.3.1.22:8010 failed (errno=61) [info] ajp_connect_to_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (959): Failed opening socket to (7.3.1.22:8010) (errno=61) [error] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1578): (Tomcat7B) connecting to backend failed. Tomcat is probably not started or is listening on the wrong port (errno=61) [info] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2543): (Tomcat7B) sending request to tomcat failed (recoverable), because of error during request sending (attempt=1) [debug] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2400): retry 1, sleeping for 100 ms before retrying [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1572): (Tomcat7B) all endpoints are disconnected. [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (484): socket TCP_NODELAY set to On [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (608): trying to connect socket 896 to 7.3.1.22:8010 [info] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (626): connect to 7.3.1.22:8010 failed (errno=61) [info] ajp_connect_to_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (959): Failed opening socket to (7.3.1.22:8010) (errno=61) [error] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1578): (Tomcat7B) connecting to backend failed. Tomcat is probably not started or is listening on the wrong port (errno=61) [info] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2543): (Tomcat7B) sending request to tomcat failed (recoverable), because of error during request sending (attempt=2) [error] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2562): (Tomcat7B) connecting to tomcat failed. [debug] ajp_reset_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (757): (Tomcat7B) resetting endpoint with socket -1 (socket shutdown) [debug] ajp_done::jk_ajp_common.c (3013): recycling connection pool slot=0 for worker Tomcat7B [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1374): worker Tomcat7B escalating local error to global error [info] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1388): service failed, worker Tomcat7B is in error state [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1399): recoverable error... will try to recover on other worker [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (946): searching worker for partial sessionid 89569C584CC4F58740D649C4BE655D36.Tomcat7B [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (954): searching worker for session route Tomcat7B [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (1001): found best worker Tomcat7A (Tomcat7A) using method 'Request' [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1161): service worker=Tomcat7A route=Tomcat7B [debug] ajp_get_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (3096): acquired connection pool slot=0 after 0 retries [debug] ajp_marshal_into_msgb::jk_ajp_common.c (605): ajp marshaling done [debug] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2379): processing Tomcat7A with 2 retries [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1572): (Tomcat7A) all endpoints are disconnected. [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (484): socket TCP_NODELAY set to On [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (608): trying to connect socket 896 to 7.3.1.22:8009 [debug] jk_open_socket::jk_connect.c (634): socket 896 [7.3.1.22:24496 -> 7.3.1.22:8009] connected [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): sending to ajp13 pos=4 len=615 max=8192 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0000 .4.c....HTTP/1.1 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0010 .../Accounter/pr [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0020 intFrameSet.jhtm [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0030 l...::1...::1... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0040 localhost..P.... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0050 ...Keep-Alive... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0060 ..0....rimage/jp [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0070 eg,.image/gif,.i [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0080 mage/pjpeg,.appl [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0090 ication/x-ms-app [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00a0 lication,.applic [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00b0 ation/xaml+xml,. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00c0 application/x-ms [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00d0 -xbap,.*/*...Acc [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00e0 ept-Encoding...g [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00f0 zip,.deflate...A [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0100 ccept-Language.. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0110 .nb-NO....]Usern [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0120 ame=NA_jose.mati [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0130 as_AT_addenergy. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0140 no;.JSESSIONID=8 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0150 9569C584CC4F5874 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0160 0D649C4BE655D36. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0170 Tomcat7B.....loc [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0180 alhost.....http: [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0190 //localhost/Acco [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01a0 unter/NemsAccoun [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01b0 ter.jhtml....uMo [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01c0 zilla/4.0.(compa [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01d0 tible;.MSIE.8.0; [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01e0 .Windows.NT.6.1; [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01f0 .WOW64;.Trident/ [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0200 4.0;.SLCC2;..NET [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0210 .CLR.2.0.50727;. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0220 .NET4.0C;..NET4. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0230 0E)............F [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0240 rameName=Reports [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0250 _CS_EUETS....Tom [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0260 cat7B........... [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1632): (Tomcat7A) request body to send 0 - request body to resend 0 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): received from ajp13 pos=0 len=238 max=8192 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0000 .....Moved.Tempo [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0010 rarily......OJSE [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0020 SSIONID=6A2507A4 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0030 626F698EC74A733C [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0040 DBA7D9FE.Tomcat7 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0050 A;.Path=/Account [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0060 er;.HttpOnly...P [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0070 ragma...no-cache [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0080 ...Cache-Control [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0090 ...no-cache....& [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 00a0 http://localhost [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 00b0 /Accounter/login [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 00c0 .jhtml.....text/ [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 00d0 html;charset=ISO [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 00e0 -8859-1.....0... [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (660): status = 302 [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (667): Number of headers is = 6 [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[0] [Set-Cookie] = [JSESSIONID=6A2507A4626F698EC74A733CDBA7D9FE.Tomcat7A; Path=/Accounter; HttpOnly] [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[1] [Pragma] = [no-cache] [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[2] [Cache-Control] = [no-cache] [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[3] [Location] = [http://localhost/Accounter/login.jhtml] [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[4] [Content-Type] = [text/html;charset=ISO-8859-1] [debug] ajp_unmarshal_response::jk_ajp_common.c (723): Header[5] [Content-Length] = [0] [debug] start_response::jk_isapi_plugin.c (963): Starting response for URI '/Accounter/printFrameSet.jhtml' (protocol HTTP/1.1) [debug] start_response::jk_isapi_plugin.c (1063): Not using Keep-Alive [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): received from ajp13 pos=0 len=2 max=8192 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0000 ................ [debug] ajp_process_callback::jk_ajp_common.c (1943): AJP13 protocol: Reuse is OK [debug] ajp_reset_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (757): (Tomcat7A) resetting endpoint with socket 896 [debug] ajp_done::jk_ajp_common.c (3013): recycling connection pool slot=0 for worker Tomcat7A [debug] HttpExtensionProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2211): service() returned OK [debug] HttpFilterProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (1851): Filter started [debug] map_uri_to_worker_ext::jk_uri_worker_map.c (1036): Attempting to map URI '/localhost/Accounter/login.jhtml' from 8 maps [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/servlet/*=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/ws/*=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/nems*.pdf=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/*.service=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/*.jhtml=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/*.json=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/jkmanager=status' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/servlet/*=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/ws/*=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/nems*.pdf=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/*.service=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (850): Attempting to map context URI '/Accounter/*.jhtml=balancer' source 'uriworkermap' [debug] find_match::jk_uri_worker_map.c (863): Found a wildchar match '/Accounter/*.jhtml=balancer' [debug] HttpFilterProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (1938): check if [/Accounter/login.jhtml] points to the web-inf directory [debug] HttpFilterProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (1954): [/Accounter/login.jhtml] is a servlet url - should redirect to balancer [debug] HttpFilterProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (1994): fowarding escaped URI [/Accounter/login.jhtml] [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2982): Reading extension header HTTP_TOMCATWORKER0000000180000000: balancer [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2983): Reading extension header HTTP_TOMCATWORKERIDX0000000180000000: 5 [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2984): Reading extension header HTTP_TOMCATURI0000000180000000: /Accounter/login.jhtml [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2985): Reading extension header HTTP_TOMCATQUERY0000000180000000: (null) [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (3040): Applying service extensions [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (3298): Service protocol=HTTP/1.1 method=GET host=::1 addr=::1 name=localhost port=80 auth= user= uri=/Accounter/login.jhtml [debug] init_ws_service::jk_isapi_plugin.c (3310): Service request headers=9 attributes=0 chunked=no content-length=0 available=0 [debug] wc_get_worker_for_name::jk_worker.c (116): found a worker balancer [debug] HttpExtensionProc::jk_isapi_plugin.c (2188): got a worker for name balancer [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1118): service sticky_session=1 id='6A2507A4626F698EC74A733CDBA7D9FE.Tomcat7A' [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (946): searching worker for partial sessionid 6A2507A4626F698EC74A733CDBA7D9FE.Tomcat7A [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (954): searching worker for session route Tomcat7A [debug] get_most_suitable_worker::jk_lb_worker.c (968): found worker Tomcat7A (Tomcat7A) for route Tomcat7A and partial sessionid 6A2507A4626F698EC74A733CDBA7D9FE.Tomcat7A [debug] service::jk_lb_worker.c (1161): service worker=Tomcat7A route=Tomcat7A [debug] ajp_get_endpoint::jk_ajp_common.c (3096): acquired connection pool slot=0 after 0 retries [debug] ajp_marshal_into_msgb::jk_ajp_common.c (605): ajp marshaling done [debug] ajp_service::jk_ajp_common.c (2379): processing Tomcat7A with 2 retries [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): sending to ajp13 pos=4 len=577 max=8192 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0000 .4.=....HTTP/1.1 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0010 .../Accounter/lo [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0020 gin.jhtml...::1. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0030 ..::1...localhos [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0040 t..P.......Keep- [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0050 Alive.....0....r [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0060 image/jpeg,.imag [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0070 e/gif,.image/pjp [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0080 eg,.application/ [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0090 x-ms-application [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00a0 ,.application/xa [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00b0 ml+xml,.applicat [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00c0 ion/x-ms-xbap,.* [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00d0 /*...Accept-Enco [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00e0 ding...gzip,.def [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 00f0 late...Accept-La [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0100 nguage...nb-NO.. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0110 ..]Username=NA_j [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0120 ose.matias_AT_ad [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0130 denergy.no;.JSES [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0140 SIONID=6A2507A46 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0150 26F698EC74A733CD [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0160 BA7D9FE.Tomcat7A [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0170 .....localhost.. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0180 ...http://localh [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0190 ost/Accounter/Ne [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01a0 msAccounter.jhtm [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01b0 l....uMozilla/4. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01c0 0.(compatible;.M [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01d0 SIE.8.0;.Windows [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01f0 Trident/4.0;.SLC [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 01e0 .NT.6.1;.WOW64;. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0200 C2;..NET.CLR.2.0 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0210 .50727;..NET4.0C [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0220 ;..NET4.0E)..... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0230 .......Tomcat7A. [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_send_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1145): 0240 ................ [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1621): (Tomcat7A) Statistics about invalid connections: connect check (0), cping (0), send (0) [debug] ajp_send_request::jk_ajp_common.c (1632): (Tomcat7A) request body to send 0 - request body to resend 0 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): received from ajp13 pos=0 len=135 max=8192 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0000 .....OK.....Prag [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0010 ma...no-cache... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0020 Expires...Thu,.0 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0030 1.Jan.1970.00:00 [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0040 :00.GMT...Cache- [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0050 Control...no-cac [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0060 he...Cache-Contr [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0070 ol...no-store... [debug] ajp_connection_tcp_get_message::jk_ajp_common.c (1329): 0080 ..2995..........

  Read the article

• Setting up Mono/ASP.NET 4.0 on Apache2/Ubuntu: Virtual hosts?

  - by Dave

  I'm attempting to setup Mono/ASP.NET 4.0 on my Apache server (which is running on Ubuntu). Thus far, I've been following a few tutorials/scripts supplied here, and here. As of now: Apache 2.2 is installed (accessible via 'localhost') Mono 2.10.5 is installed However, I'm struggling to configure Apache correctly... apparently the Virtual Host setting isn't doing its job and invoking the mod_mono plugin, nor is it even pulling source from the proper directory. While the Virtual Host setting points to '\srv\www\localhost', it clearly is pulling content instead from 'var/www/', which I've found is the default DocumentRoot for virtual hosts. I can confirm: "/opt/mono-2.10/bin/mod-mono-server4" exists. Virtual hosts file is being read, since undoing the comment in the main httpd.conf changed the root directory from 'htdocs' to 'var/www/' The Mono installation is at least semi-capable of running ASP 4.0, as evidenced by running XSP, navigating to 0.0.0.0:8080/ and getting an ASP.NET style error page with "Mono ASP 4.0.x" at the bottom. Can anyone point out how to fix these configurations and get Mono linked up with Apache? Here are my configs and relevant information: /usr/local/apache2/conf/httpd.conf: # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo_log" # with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache2" will be interpreted by the # server as "/usr/local/apache2/logs/foo_log". # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "/usr/local/apache2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin david@localhost # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # ServerName localhost:80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "/usr/local/apache2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride None # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error_log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access_log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access_log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://www.example.com/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "/usr/local/apache2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://www.example.com/subscription_info.html # # # MaxRanges: Maximum number of Ranges in a request before # returning the entire resource, or 0 for unlimited # Default setting is to accept 200 Ranges #MaxRanges 0 # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> * /usr/local/apache2/conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf * # # Virtual Hosts # # If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your # machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations # use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about # IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below. # # Please see the documentation at # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/vhosts/> # for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts. # # You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host # configuration. # # Use name-based virtual hosting. # NameVirtualHost *:80 # # VirtualHost example: # Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container. # The first VirtualHost section is used for all requests that do not # match a ServerName or ServerAlias in any <VirtualHost> block. # <VirtualHost *:80> ServerName localhost ServerAdmin david@localhost DocumentRoot "/srv/www/localhost" # MonoServerPath can be changed to specify which version of ASP.NET is hosted # mod-mono-server1 = ASP.NET 1.1 / mod-mono-server2 = ASP.NET 2.0 # For SUSE Linux Enterprise Mono Extension, uncomment the line below: # MonoServerPath localhost "/opt/novell/mono/bin/mod-mono-server2" # For Mono on openSUSE, uncomment the line below instead: MonoServerPath localhost "/opt/mono-2.10/bin/mod-mono-server4" # To obtain line numbers in stack traces you need to do two things: # 1) Enable Debug code generation in your page by using the Debug="true" # page directive, or by setting <compilation debug="true" /> in the # application's Web.config # 2) Uncomment the MonoDebug true directive below to enable mod_mono debugging MonoDebug localhost true # The MONO_IOMAP environment variable can be configured to provide platform abstraction # for file access in Linux. Valid values for MONO_IOMAP are: # case # drive # all # Uncomment the line below to alter file access behavior for the configured application MonoSetEnv localhost PATH=/opt/mono-2.10/bin:$PATH;LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/mono-2.10/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH; # # Additional environtment variables can be set for this server instance using # the MonoSetEnv directive. MonoSetEnv takes a string of 'name=value' pairs # separated by semicolons. For instance, to enable platform abstraction *and* # use Mono's old regular expression interpreter (which is slower, but has a # shorter setup time), uncomment the line below instead: # MonoSetEnv localhost MONO_IOMAP=all;MONO_OLD_RX=1 MonoApplications localhost "/:/srv/www/localhost" <Location "/"> Allow from all Order allow,deny MonoSetServerAlias localhost SetHandler mono SetOutputFilter DEFLATE SetEnvIfNoCase Request_URI "\.(?:gif|jpe?g|png)$" no-gzip dont-vary </Location> <IfModule mod_deflate.c> AddOutputFilterByType DEFLATE text/html text/plain text/xml text/javascript </IfModule> </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *:80> ServerAdmin [email protected] DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/docs/dummy-host.example.com" ServerName dummy-host.example.com ServerAlias www.dummy-host.example.com ErrorLog "logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log" CustomLog "logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log" common </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *:80> ServerAdmin [email protected] DocumentRoot "/usr/local/apache2/docs/dummy-host2.example.com" ServerName dummy-host2.example.com ErrorLog "logs/dummy-host2.example.com-error_log" CustomLog "logs/dummy-host2.example.com-access_log" common </VirtualHost> mono -V output: root@david-ubuntu:~# mono -V Mono JIT compiler version 2.6.7 (Debian 2.6.7-5ubuntu3) Copyright (C) 2002-2010 Novell, Inc and Contributors. www.mono-project.com TLS: __thread GC: Included Boehm (with typed GC and Parallel Mark) SIGSEGV: altstack Notifications: epoll Architecture: amd64 Disabled: none

  Read the article

• htaccess rewriterule works in one virtualhost, but not a second virtualhost

  - by Casey Flynn

  I have two virtualhosts configured with xampp on mac os x snow lion. Both use the following .htaccess file. <IfModule mod_rewrite.c> RewriteEngine On RewriteBase / # Protect hidden files from being viewed <Files .*> Order Deny,Allow Deny From All </Files> #Removes access to the system folder by users. #Additionally this will allow you to create a System.php controller, #previously this would not have been possible. #'system' can be replaced if you have renamed your system folder. RewriteCond %{REQUEST_URI} ^system.* RewriteRule ^(.*)$ /index.php?/$1 [L] #When your application folder isn't in the system folder #This snippet prevents user access to the application folder #Submitted by: Fabdrol #Rename 'application' to your applications folder name. RewriteCond %{REQUEST_URI} ^application.* RewriteRule ^(.*)$ /index.php?/$1 [L] #Checks to see if the user is attempting to access a valid file, #such as an image or css document, if this isn't true it sends the #request to index.php RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} !-f RewriteCond %{REQUEST_FILENAME} !-d RewriteRule ^(.*)$ index.php/$01 [L] # If we don't have mod_rewrite installed, all 404's # can be sent to index.php, and everything works as normal. # Submitted by: ElliotHaughin ErrorDocument 404 /index.php My goal is to eliminate /index.php/ from my url strings. This htaccess works perfectly for one project, but not for the other (project/vhost) This is my vhosts.conf # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "/Applications/xampp/xamppfiles" will be interpreted by the # server as "/Applications/xampp/xamppfiles/logs/foo.log". # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "/Applications/XAMPP/xamppfiles" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so LoadModule bucketeer_module modules/mod_bucketeer.so LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule echo_module modules/mod_echo.so LoadModule case_filter_module modules/mod_case_filter.so LoadModule case_filter_in_module modules/mod_case_filter_in.so LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule suexec_module modules/mod_suexec.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so LoadModule cgid_module modules/mod_cgid.so LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so #LoadModule apreq_module modules/mod_apreq2.so LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so <IfDefine JUSTTOMAKEAPXSHAPPY> LoadModule php4_module modules/libphp4.so LoadModule php5_module modules/libphp5.so </IfDefine> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User nobody Group nogroup </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName www.example.com:80 # XAMPP ServerName localhost # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "/Users/caseyflynn/Documents/workspace/vibecompass" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None #XAMPP #Order deny,allow #Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "/Users/caseyflynn/Documents/workspace/vibecompass"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks ExecCGI Includes # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride All # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.htmls index.htm </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog logs/error_log # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog logs/access_log common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog logs/access_log combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://www.example.com/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/Applications/XAMPP/xamppfiles/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "/Applications/xampp/xamppfiles/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "/Applications/XAMPP/xamppfiles/phpmyadmin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig etc/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi AddHandler cgi-script .cgi .pl # For files that include their own HTTP headers: #AddHandler send-as-is asis # For server-parsed imagemap files: #AddHandler imap-file map # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # AddType text/html .shtml AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile etc/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://www.example.com/subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # EnableMMAP off EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the /Applications/xampp/etc/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections Include /Applications/XAMPP/etc/extra/httpd-ssl.conf <IfModule ssl_module> <IfDefine SSL> Include etc/extra/httpd-ssl.conf </IfDefine> </IfModule> # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #XAMPP Include etc/extra/httpd-xampp.conf Any idea what might be the root of this? ANSWER: had to add this to my httpd.conf file <Directory /Users/caseyflynn/Documents/workspace/cobar> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride all #XAMPP Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory>

  Read the article

• Windows could not start Apache 2 on the local computer

  - by andig

  After installing PHP 5.3, Windows is unable to start Apache 2.2. Apache's error log is empty, no error message on startup: C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k start C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k stop The Apache2.2 service is not started. C:\Programme\Apache\bin>httpd -k config Reconfiguring the Apache2.2 service The Apache2.2 service is successfully installed. Testing httpd.conf.... Errors reported here must be corrected before the service can be started. I have no clue where to look for the cause. php5apache2_2.dll is copied to the Apache modules folder. The configuration looks like this: LoadModule php5_module modules/php5apache2_2.dll PHPIniDir "C:/programme/php" Where and how can I start diagnosis? The only hint I have so far is that startup fails as soon as a PHP module is enabled in the configuration. Is there a way to get more details out of the Apache startup process? This is the http.conf: # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Programme/Apache" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Programme/Apache/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Programme/Apache" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so #LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule proxy_scgi_module modules/mod_proxy_scgi.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so #LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #!! LoadModule php5_module modules/php5apache2_2.dll PHPIniDir "C:/programme/php" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName localhost:8080 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/data/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Deny from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/data/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride None # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel debug <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http://localhost/bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Programme/Apache/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http://localhost/subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #!! <IfModule mod_php5.c> AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .php5 AddType application/x-httpd-php-source .phps </IfModule>

  Read the article

• Apache won't accept external requests

  - by Eric

  I am running Apache 2.2 on windows and I would like to access it remotely. Currently I can only access it from my local machine. I know the problem is not port forwarding because I tested it with other web servers (written in python). My httpd.conf file is below. I installed apache with the PHP installer. # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #LoadModule php5_module "c:/php/php5apache2_2.dll" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName :80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride All # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml index.htm default.html default.php default.phtml default.htm </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http:///bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .phtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http:///subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #PHPIniDir "c:/php" #BEGIN PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL PHPIniDir "C:/PHP/" LoadModule php5_module "C:/PHP/php5apache2_2.dll" #END PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL P.S sorry for the shortness of this post. I am in a rush

  Read the article

• Apache won't accept external requests

  - by Eric

  I am running Apache 2.2 on windows and I would like to access it remotely. Currently I can only access it from my local machine. I know the problem is not port forwarding because I tested it with other web servers (written in python). My httpd.conf file is below. I installed apache with the PHP installer. # # This is the main Apache HTTP server configuration file. It contains the # configuration directives that give the server its instructions. # See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2> for detailed information. # In particular, see # <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/directives.html> # for a discussion of each configuration directive. # # Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding # what they do. They're here only as hints or reminders. If you are unsure # consult the online docs. You have been warned. # # Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many # of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the # server will use that explicit path. If the filenames do *not* begin # with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log" # with ServerRoot set to "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" will be interpreted by the # server as "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/logs/foo.log". # # NOTE: Where filenames are specified, you must use forward slashes # instead of backslashes (e.g., "c:/apache" instead of "c:\apache"). # If a drive letter is omitted, the drive on which httpd.exe is located # will be used by default. It is recommended that you always supply # an explicit drive letter in absolute paths to avoid confusion. # # ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's # configuration, error, and log files are kept. # # Do not add a slash at the end of the directory path. If you point # ServerRoot at a non-local disk, be sure to point the LockFile directive # at a local disk. If you wish to share the same ServerRoot for multiple # httpd daemons, you will need to change at least LockFile and PidFile. # ServerRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2" # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or # ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost> # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support # # To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you # have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the # directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used. # Statically compiled modules (those listed by `httpd -l') do not need # to be loaded here. # # Example: # LoadModule foo_module modules/mod_foo.so # LoadModule actions_module modules/mod_actions.so LoadModule alias_module modules/mod_alias.so LoadModule asis_module modules/mod_asis.so LoadModule auth_basic_module modules/mod_auth_basic.so #LoadModule auth_digest_module modules/mod_auth_digest.so #LoadModule authn_alias_module modules/mod_authn_alias.so #LoadModule authn_anon_module modules/mod_authn_anon.so #LoadModule authn_dbd_module modules/mod_authn_dbd.so #LoadModule authn_dbm_module modules/mod_authn_dbm.so LoadModule authn_default_module modules/mod_authn_default.so LoadModule authn_file_module modules/mod_authn_file.so #LoadModule authnz_ldap_module modules/mod_authnz_ldap.so #LoadModule authz_dbm_module modules/mod_authz_dbm.so LoadModule authz_default_module modules/mod_authz_default.so LoadModule authz_groupfile_module modules/mod_authz_groupfile.so LoadModule authz_host_module modules/mod_authz_host.so #LoadModule authz_owner_module modules/mod_authz_owner.so LoadModule authz_user_module modules/mod_authz_user.so LoadModule autoindex_module modules/mod_autoindex.so #LoadModule cache_module modules/mod_cache.so #LoadModule cern_meta_module modules/mod_cern_meta.so LoadModule cgi_module modules/mod_cgi.so #LoadModule charset_lite_module modules/mod_charset_lite.so #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so #LoadModule dav_lock_module modules/mod_dav_lock.so #LoadModule dbd_module modules/mod_dbd.so #LoadModule deflate_module modules/mod_deflate.so LoadModule dir_module modules/mod_dir.so #LoadModule disk_cache_module modules/mod_disk_cache.so #LoadModule dumpio_module modules/mod_dumpio.so LoadModule env_module modules/mod_env.so #LoadModule expires_module modules/mod_expires.so #LoadModule ext_filter_module modules/mod_ext_filter.so #LoadModule file_cache_module modules/mod_file_cache.so #LoadModule filter_module modules/mod_filter.so #LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so #LoadModule ident_module modules/mod_ident.so #LoadModule imagemap_module modules/mod_imagemap.so LoadModule include_module modules/mod_include.so LoadModule info_module modules/mod_info.so LoadModule isapi_module modules/mod_isapi.so #LoadModule ldap_module modules/mod_ldap.so #LoadModule logio_module modules/mod_logio.so LoadModule log_config_module modules/mod_log_config.so #LoadModule log_forensic_module modules/mod_log_forensic.so #LoadModule mem_cache_module modules/mod_mem_cache.so LoadModule mime_module modules/mod_mime.so #LoadModule mime_magic_module modules/mod_mime_magic.so LoadModule negotiation_module modules/mod_negotiation.so #LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so #LoadModule proxy_ajp_module modules/mod_proxy_ajp.so #LoadModule proxy_balancer_module modules/mod_proxy_balancer.so #LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so #LoadModule proxy_ftp_module modules/mod_proxy_ftp.so #LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so #LoadModule reqtimeout_module modules/mod_reqtimeout.so #LoadModule rewrite_module modules/mod_rewrite.so LoadModule setenvif_module modules/mod_setenvif.so #LoadModule speling_module modules/mod_speling.so #LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so LoadModule status_module modules/mod_status.so #LoadModule substitute_module modules/mod_substitute.so #LoadModule unique_id_module modules/mod_unique_id.so #LoadModule userdir_module modules/mod_userdir.so #LoadModule usertrack_module modules/mod_usertrack.so #LoadModule version_module modules/mod_version.so #LoadModule vhost_alias_module modules/mod_vhost_alias.so #LoadModule php5_module "c:/php/php5apache2_2.dll" <IfModule !mpm_netware_module> <IfModule !mpm_winnt_module> # # If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run # httpd as root initially and it will switch. # # User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as. # It is usually good practice to create a dedicated user and group for # running httpd, as with most system services. # User daemon Group daemon </IfModule> </IfModule> # 'Main' server configuration # # The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main' # server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a # <VirtualHost> definition. These values also provide defaults for # any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file. # # All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers, # in which case these default settings will be overridden for the # virtual host being defined. # # # ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be # e-mailed. This address appears on some server-generated pages, such # as error documents. e.g. [email protected] # ServerAdmin [email protected] # # ServerName gives the name and port that the server uses to identify itself. # This can often be determined automatically, but we recommend you specify # it explicitly to prevent problems during startup. # # If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here. # #ServerName :80 # # DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your # documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but # symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations. # DocumentRoot "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs" # # Each directory to which Apache has access can be configured with respect # to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that # directory (and its subdirectories). # # First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of # features. # <Directory /> Options FollowSymLinks AllowOverride None Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow # particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as # you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it # below. # # # This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/htdocs"> # # Possible values for the Options directive are "None", "All", # or any combination of: # Indexes Includes FollowSymLinks SymLinksifOwnerMatch ExecCGI MultiViews # # Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All" # doesn't give it to you. # # The Options directive is both complicated and important. Please see # http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/core.html#options # for more information. # Options Indexes FollowSymLinks # # AllowOverride controls what directives may be placed in .htaccess files. # It can be "All", "None", or any combination of the keywords: # Options FileInfo AuthConfig Limit # AllowOverride All # # Controls who can get stuff from this server. # Order deny,allow Allow from all </Directory> # # DirectoryIndex: sets the file that Apache will serve if a directory # is requested. # <IfModule dir_module> DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml index.htm default.html default.php default.phtml default.htm </IfModule> # # The following lines prevent .htaccess and .htpasswd files from being # viewed by Web clients. # <FilesMatch "^\.ht"> Order allow,deny Deny from all Satisfy All </FilesMatch> # # ErrorLog: The location of the error log file. # If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost> # container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be # logged here. If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost> # container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here. # ErrorLog "logs/error.log" # # LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log. # Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit, # alert, emerg. # LogLevel warn <IfModule log_config_module> # # The following directives define some format nicknames for use with # a CustomLog directive (see below). # LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common <IfModule logio_module> # You need to enable mod_logio.c to use %I and %O LogFormat "%h %l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\" %I %O" combinedio </IfModule> # # The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format). # If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost> # container, they will be logged here. Contrariwise, if you *do* # define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be # logged therein and *not* in this file. # CustomLog "logs/access.log" common # # If you prefer a logfile with access, agent, and referer information # (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive. # #CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined </IfModule> <IfModule alias_module> # # Redirect: Allows you to tell clients about documents that used to # exist in your server's namespace, but do not anymore. The client # will make a new request for the document at its new location. # Example: # Redirect permanent /foo http:///bar # # Alias: Maps web paths into filesystem paths and is used to # access content that does not live under the DocumentRoot. # Example: # Alias /webpath /full/filesystem/path # # If you include a trailing / on /webpath then the server will # require it to be present in the URL. You will also likely # need to provide a <Directory> section to allow access to # the filesystem path. # # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts. # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that # documents in the target directory are treated as applications and # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the # client. The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias # directives as to Alias. # ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin/" </IfModule> <IfModule cgid_module> # # ScriptSock: On threaded servers, designate the path to the UNIX # socket used to communicate with the CGI daemon of mod_cgid. # #Scriptsock logs/cgisock </IfModule> # # "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured. # <Directory "C:/Program Files (x86)/Apache Software Foundation/Apache2.2/cgi-bin"> AllowOverride None Options None Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory> # # DefaultType: the default MIME type the server will use for a document # if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions. # If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is # a good value. If most of your content is binary, such as applications # or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to # keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are # text. # DefaultType text/plain <IfModule mime_module> # # TypesConfig points to the file containing the list of mappings from # filename extension to MIME-type. # TypesConfig conf/mime.types # # AddType allows you to add to or override the MIME configuration # file specified in TypesConfig for specific file types. # #AddType application/x-gzip .tgz # # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this. # #AddEncoding x-compress .Z #AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz # # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types: # AddType application/x-compress .Z AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz # # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers": # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server # or added with the Action directive (see below) # # To use CGI scripts outside of ScriptAliased directories: # (You will also need to add "ExecCGI" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi # For type maps (negotiated resources): #AddHandler type-map var # # Filters allow you to process content before it is sent to the client. # # To parse .shtml files for server-side includes (SSI): # (You will also need to add "Includes" to the "Options" directive.) # #AddType text/html .shtml #AddOutputFilter INCLUDES .shtml AddType application/x-httpd-php .php AddType application/x-httpd-php .phtml </IfModule> # # The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the # contents of the file itself to determine its type. The MIMEMagicFile # directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located. # #MIMEMagicFile conf/magic # # Customizable error responses come in three flavors: # 1) plain text 2) local redirects 3) external redirects # # Some examples: #ErrorDocument 500 "The server made a boo boo." #ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html #ErrorDocument 404 "/cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl" #ErrorDocument 402 http:///subscription_info.html # # # EnableMMAP and EnableSendfile: On systems that support it, # memory-mapping or the sendfile syscall is used to deliver # files. This usually improves server performance, but must # be turned off when serving from networked-mounted # filesystems or if support for these functions is otherwise # broken on your system. # #EnableMMAP off #EnableSendfile off # Supplemental configuration # # The configuration files in the conf/extra/ directory can be # included to add extra features or to modify the default configuration of # the server, or you may simply copy their contents here and change as # necessary. # Server-pool management (MPM specific) #Include conf/extra/httpd-mpm.conf # Multi-language error messages #Include conf/extra/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf # Fancy directory listings #Include conf/extra/httpd-autoindex.conf # Language settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-languages.conf # User home directories #Include conf/extra/httpd-userdir.conf # Real-time info on requests and configuration #Include conf/extra/httpd-info.conf # Virtual hosts #Include conf/extra/httpd-vhosts.conf # Local access to the Apache HTTP Server Manual #Include conf/extra/httpd-manual.conf # Distributed authoring and versioning (WebDAV) #Include conf/extra/httpd-dav.conf # Various default settings #Include conf/extra/httpd-default.conf # Secure (SSL/TLS) connections #Include conf/extra/httpd-ssl.conf # # Note: The following must must be present to support # starting without SSL on platforms with no /dev/random equivalent # but a statically compiled-in mod_ssl. # <IfModule ssl_module> SSLRandomSeed startup builtin SSLRandomSeed connect builtin </IfModule> #PHPIniDir "c:/php" #BEGIN PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL PHPIniDir "C:/PHP/" LoadModule php5_module "C:/PHP/php5apache2_2.dll" #END PHP INSTALLER EDITS - REMOVE ONLY ON UNINSTALL P.S sorry for the shortness of this post. I am in a rush

  Read the article

• UPDATE FOR BI PUBLISHER ENTERPRISE 10.1.3.4.1 MARCH 2010

  - by Tim Dexter

  Latest roll up patch for 10.1.3.4.1 is now out in the wild. Yep, there are bug fixes but the guys have implemented some great enhancements. I'll be covering some of them over the coming weeks, from collapsing bookmarks in your PDFs to better MS AD support to 'true' Excel templates, yes you read that correctly! Patch is available from Oracle's support site. Just search for patch 9546699. Here's the contents and readme, apologies for the big list but at least you can search against it for a particular fix. This patch contains backports of following bugs for BI Publisher Enterprise 10.1.3.4.0 and 10.1.3.4.1. 6193342 - REG:SAMPLE DATA FILE FOR PDF FORM MAPPING IS NOT VALIDATED 6261875 - ERRONEOUS PRECISION VALIDATION ON ONLINE ANALYZER 6439437 - NULL POINTER EXCEPTION WHEN PROCESSING TABLE OF CONTENT 6460974 - BACS EFT PAYMENT INSTRUCTION OUTPUT FILE IS EMPTY 6939721 - BIP: REPORT BUSTING DELIVERY KEY VALUES CANNOT CONTAIN SEVERAL SPECIAL CHARACTER 6996069 - USING XML DB FOR BI REPOSITORY FAILS WITH RESOURCENOTFOUNDEXCEPTION 7207434 - TIMEZONE:SHOULD NOT DO TIMEZONE CONVERSION AGAINST CANONICAL DATE YYYY-MM-DD 7371531 - SUPPORT FOR CSV OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURED XML AND NON SQL DATA SOURCES 7596148 - ER: LDAP FOR MS AD TO SEARCH FROM AD ROOT 7646139 - WEBSERVICES ERROR 7829516 - BIP STANDALONE FAILS TO BURST USING XSL-FO TEMPLATES 8219848 - PDF TEMPLATE REPORT NOT PERFORMING PAGE BREAK 8232116 - PARAMETER VALUE IS PASSED AS NULL,IF IT CONTAINS 'AND' WITHIN THE STRING 8250690 - NOT ABLE TO UPLOAD TEMPLATE VIA BIP API 8288459 - ER: QUERY BUILDER OPTION TO NOT INCLUDE TABLENAME. PREFIX IN SQL 8289600 - REPORT TITLE AND DESCRIPTION CAN'T SUPPORT MULTIPLE LANGUAGES 8327080 - CAN NOT CONFIGURE ORACLE EBUSINESS SUITE SECURITY MODEL WITH ORACLE RAC 8332164 - AN XDO PROPERTY TO ENABLE DEBUG LOGGING 8333289 - WEB SERVICE JOBS FAIL AFTER BIP STARTED UP 8340239 - HTTP NOTIFY IS MISSING IN SCHEDULEREPORTREQUEST 8360933 - UNABLE TO USE LOGGED IN BI USER AS THE WSSECURITY USERNAME IN A VARIABLE FORMAT 8400744 - ADMINISTRATOR USER DOES NOT HAVE FULL ADMINISTRATOR RIGHTS 8402436 - CRASH CAUSED BY UNDETERMINED ATTRKEY ERROR IN MULTI-THREADED 8403779 - IMPOSSIBLE TO CONFIGURE PARAMETER FOR A REPORT 8412259 - PDF, RTF OUTPUT NOT HANDLING THE TABLE BORDER AND CONTENT OVERFLOWS TO NEXT PAGE 8483919 - DYNAMIC DATASOURCE WEBSERVICE SHOULD WORK WITH SERVERSIDE CONNECTIONS 8444382 - ID ATTRIBUTE IN TITLE-PAGE DOES NOT WORK WITH SELECTACTION PROPERTY 8446681 - UI LANGUAGE IS NOT REFLECTED AT THE FIRST LOG IN 8449884 - PUBLICREPORTSERVICE FAILS ON EMAIL DELIVERY USING BIP 10.1.3.4.0D+ - NPE 8454858 - DB: XMLP_ADMIN CAN SEE ALL THE FOLDERS BUT ONLY HAS VIEW PERMISSIONS 8458818 - PDFBOOKBINDER FAILS WITH OUTOFMEMORY ERROR WHEN TRYING TO BIND > 1500 PDFS 8463992 - INCORRECT IMPLEMENTATION OF XLIFF SPECIFICATION 8468777 - BI PUBLISHER QUERY BUILDER NOT LOADING SCHEMA OBJECTS 8477310 - QUERY BUILDER NOT WORK WITH SSL ON STANDALONE OC4J 8506701 - POSITIVE PAY FILE WITH OPTIONS NOT CREATING FILE CHECKS OVER 2500 8506761 - PERFORMANCE: PDFBOOKBINDER CLASS TAKES 4 HOURS TO BIND 4000 PAGES 8535604 - NPE WHEN CLICKING "ANALYZER FOR EXCEL" BUTTON IN ALL_* REPORTS 8536246 - REMOVE-PDF-FIELDS DOES NOT WORK WITH CHECKBOXES WITH OPT ARRAY 8541792 - NULLPOINTER EXCEPTION WHILE USING SFTP PROTOCOL 8554443 - LOGGING TIME STAMP IN 10G: THE HOUR PART IS WRONG 8558007 - UNABLE TO LOGIN BIP WITH UNPRIVILEGED USER WHEN XDB IS USED FOR REPORSITORY STOR 8565758 - NEED TO CONNECT IMPERSONATION TO DATA SOURCE WITH PL/SQL FUNCTION 8567235 - EFTPROCESSOR AND XDO DEBUG ENABLED CAUSES ORG.XML.SAX.SAXPARSEEXCEPTION 8572216 - EFTPROCESSOR NOT THREAD SAFE - CAUSING CORRUPTED REPORTS TO BE GENERATED 8575776 - LANDSCAPE REPORT ORIENTAION NOT SELECTED WHEN REPORT IS PRINTED WITH PS 8588330 - XLIFF GENERATING WITH WRONG MAXWIDTH ATTRIBUTE IN SOME TRANS-UNITS 8584446 - EFTGENERATOR DOES NOT USE XSLT SCALABILITY - JAVA.LANG.OUTOFMEMORY EXCEPTION 8594954 - ENG: BIP NOTIFY MESSAGE BECOMES ENGLISH 8599646 - ER:EXTRA SPACE ADDED BELOW IMAGE IN A TABLE CELL OF TEMPLATE IN FIREFOX 8605110 - PDFSIGNATURE API ENCOUNTERS JAVA.LANG.NULLPOINTEREXCEPTION ON PDF WITH WATERMARK 8660915 - BURSTING WITH DATA TEMPLATE NOT WORKING WITH OPTION: VALUE=FALSE 8660920 - ER: EXTRACT XHTML DATA USING XDODTEXE IN XHTML FORMAT 8667150 - PROBLEM WITH 3RD APPLICATION ABOUT PDF GENERATED WITH BI PUBLISHER 8683547 - "CLICK VIEW REPORT BUTTON TO GENERATE THE REPORT" MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED 8713080 - SEARCH" PARAMETER IS NOT SHOWING NON ENGLISH DATA IN INTERNET EXPLORER 8724778 - EXCEL ANALYZER PARAMETERS DO NOT WORK WITH EXCEL 2007 8725450 - UIX 2.3.6.6 UPTAKE FOR 10.1.3.4.1 8728807 - DYNAMIC JDBC DATA SOURCE WITH PRE-PROCESS FUNCTION BASED ON EXISTING DATA SOURCE 8759558 - XDO TEMPLATE SHOWS CURRENCY IN WRONG FORMAT FOR DUNNING 8792894 - EFTPROCESSOR DOES NOT SUPPORT XSL TEMPLATE AS INPUTSTREAM 8793550 - BIP GENERATES CSV REPORTS OUTPUT FORMAT WITH EXTENTION .OUT NOT .CSV IN EMAIL 8819869 - PERIOD CLOSE VALUE SUMMARY REPORT (XML) RUNNING INTO WARNING 8825732 - MY FOLDERS LINK BROKEN WITH USER NAME THAT INCLUDES A SLASH (/) OBIEE SECURITY 8831948 - TRYING TO GENERATE A SCATTER PLOT USING THE CHART WIZARD 8842299 - SEEDED QUERY ALWAYS RETURNS RESULTS BASED ON FIRST COLUMN 8858027 - NODE.GETTEXTCONTEXT() NOT AVAILABLE IN 10G UNDER OC4J 8859957 - REPORT TITLE ALIGNMENT GOES BAD FOR REPORTS WITH XLIFF FILE ATTACHED 8860957 - ER: IMPROVE PERFORMANCE OF ANSWERS PARAMETERS 8891537 - GETREPORTPARAMETERS WEB SERVICE API ISSUES WITH OAAM REPORTS 8891558 - GETTING SQLEXCEPTION IN GENERATEREPORT WEB SERVICE API ON OAAM REPORTS 8927796 - ER: DYANAMIC DATA SOURCE SUPPORT BY DATA SOURCE NAME 8969898 - BI PUBLISHER WEB SERVICE GETREPORTPARAMETERS DOES NOT TRANSLATE PARAMETER LABEL 8998967 - MULTIPLE XSL PREDICATES ELEMENT[A='A'] [B='B'] CAUSES XML-22019 ERROR 9012511 - SCALABLE MODE IS NOT WORKING IN XMLPUBLISHER 10.1.3.4 9016976 - ER: PRINT XSL-T AND FOPROCESSING TIMING INFORMATION 9018580 - WEB SERVICE CALL FAILS WHEN REPORT INCLUDES SEARCH TYPE 9018657 - JOB FAILS WHEN LOV QUERY CONTAINS BIND VARIABLES :XDO_USER_UI_LOCALE 9021224 - PERFORMANCE ISSUE TO VIEW DASHBOARD PAGE WITH BIP REPORT LINKS 9022440 - ER: SUPPORT "COMB OF N CHARACTERS" FEATURE PDF FORM TEXT FIELDS 9026236 - XPATH DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY IN 10.1.3.4.1 9051652 - FILE EXTENSION OF CSV OUTPUT IS TXT WHEN IT IS EXPORTED FROM REPORT VIEWER 9053770 - WHEN SENDING CSV REPORT OUTPUT BY EMAIL SOMETIMES IT IS SENT WITHOUT EXTENSION 9066483 - PDFBOOKBINDER LEAVE SOME TEMPORARY FILES AFTER MERGING TITLE PAGE OR TOC 9102420 - USE RELATIVE PATHS IN HYPERLINKS 9127185 - CHECKBOX NOT WORK ON SUB TEMPLATE 9149679 - BASE URL IS NOT PASSED CORRECTLY 9149691 - PROVIDE A WAY TO DISABLE THE ABILITY TO CREATE SCHEDULED REPORT JOB "PUBLIC" 9167822 - NOTIFICATION URL BREAKS ON FOLDER NAMES WITH SPACES 9167913 - CHARTS ARE MISSING IN PDF OUTPUTS WHEN THE DEFAULT OUTPUT FORMAT IS NOT A PDF 9217965 - REPORT HISTORY TAKES LONG TIME TO RENDER THE PAGE 9236674 - BI PUBLISHER PARAMETERS DO NOT CASCADE REFRESH AFTER SECOND PARAMETER 9283933 - OPTION TO COLLAPSE PDF OUTPUT BOOKMARKS BY DEFAULT 9287245 - SAVE COMPLETED SCHEDULED REPORTS IN ITS REPORT NAME AND NOT IN A GENERIC NAME 9348862 - ADD FEATURE TO DISABLE THE XSLT1.0-COMPATIBILITY IN RTF TEMPLATE 9355897 - ER: NEED A SAFE DIVIDE FUNCTION 9364169 - UIX 2.3.6.6 PATCH UPTAKE FOR 10.1.3.4.1 9365153 - LEADING WHITESPACE CHARACTERS IN A FIELD TRIMMED WHEN RUN VIEW OR EXPORT TO .CSV 9389039 - LONG TEXT IS NOT WRAPPED PROPERLY IN THE AUTOSHAPE ON RTF TEMPLATE 9475697 - ENH: SUB-TEMPLATE:DYNAMIC VARIABLE WITH PARAMETER VALUE IN CALL-TEMPLATE CLAUSE 9484549 - CHANGE DEFAULT FOR "XSLT1.0-COMPATIBILITY" TO FALSE FOR 10G 9508499 - UNABLE TO READ EXCEL FILE IF MORE THAN 1800 ROWS GENERATED 9546078 - EMAIL DELIVERY INFORMATION SHOULD NOT BE SAVED AND AUTO-FED IN JOB SUBMISSION 9546101 - EXCEPTION OCCURS WHEN SFTP/FTP REMOTE FILENAME DOSE NOT CONTAIN A SLASH '/' 9546117 - SFTP REPORT DELIVERY FAILS WITH NO CLASS DEF FOUND EXCEPTION ON WEBLOGIC 9.2 Following bugs are included in 10.1.3.4.1 and they are only applied to 10.1.3.4.0. 4612604 - FROM EDGE ATTRIBUTE OF HEADER AND FOOTER IS NOT PRESERVED 6621006 - PARAMNAMEVALUE ELEMENT DEFINITION SHOULD HAVE PARAMETER TYPE 6811967 - DATE PARAMETER NOT HANDLING DATE OFFSET WHEN PASSED UPPERCASE Z FOR OFFSET 6864451 - WHEN BIP REPORTS TIMEOUT, THE PROCESS TO LOG BACK IN IS NOT USER FRIENDLY 6869887 - FUSION CURRENCY BRD:4.1.4/4.1.6 OVERRIDINDG MASK /W XSLT._XDOCURMASKS /W SYMBOL 6959078 - "TEXT FIELD CONTAINS COMMA-SEPARATED VALUES" DOESN'T WORK IN CASE OF STRING 6994647 - GETTING ERROR MESSAGE SAYING JOB FAILED EVEN THOUGH WORKS OK IN BI PUBLISHER 7133143 - ENABLE USER TO ENTER 'TODAY' AS VALUE TO DATE PARAMETER IN SCHEDULE REPORT UI 7165117 - QA_BIP_FUNC:-CLOSED LIFE TIME REPORT ERROR MESSAGE IN CMD 7167068 - LEADER-LENGTH OR RULE-THICKNESS PROPRTY IS TOO LARGE 7219517 - NEED EXTENSION FUNCTIONS TO URL ENCODE TEXT STRING. 7269228 - TEMPLATEHELPER PRODUCES A GARBLED OUTPUT WHEN INVOKED BY MULTIPLE THREADS 7276813 - GETREPORTPARAMETERSRETURN ELEMENT SHOULD HAVE DEFAULT VALUE 7279046 - SCHDEULER:UNABLE TO DELETE A JOB USING API 7280336 - ER: BI PUBLISHER - SITEMINDER SUPPORT - GENERIC NON-ORACLE SSO SUPPORT 7281468 - MODIFY SQL SERVER PROPERTIES TO USE HYP DATA DIRECT IN JDBCDEFAULTS.XML 7281495 - PLEASE ADD SUPPORTED DBS TO JDBCDEFAULT.XML AND LIST EACH DB VERSION SEPARATELY 7282456 - FUSION CURRENCY BRD 4.1.9.2: CURRENCY AMOUTS SHOULD NOT BE WRAPPED. MINUS SIGN 7282507 - FUSION CURRENCY BRD4.1.2.5:DISPLAY CURRENCY AND LOCALE DERIVED CURRENCY SYMBOL 7284780 - FUSION CURRENCY BRD 4.1.12.4 CORRECTLY ALIGN NEGATIVE CURRENCY AMOUNTS 7306874 - OPP ERROR - JAVA.LANG.OUTOFMEMORYERROR: ZIP002:OUTOFMEMORYERROR, MEM_ERROR 7309596 - SIEBELCRM: BIP ENHANCEMENT REQUEST FOR SIEBEL PARAMETERIZATION 7337173 - UI LOCALE IS ALWAYS REWRITTEN TO EN WHEN MOVE FROM DASHBOARD 7338349 - REG:ANALYZER REPORT WITH AVERAGE FUNCTION FAIL TO RUN FOR NON INTERACTIVE FORMAT 7343757 - OUTPUT FORMAT OF TEMPLATES IS NOT SAVING 7345989 - SET XDK REPLACEILLEGALCHARS AND ENHANCE XSLTWRAPPER WARNING 7354775 - UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOR OF LAYOUT TEMPLATE PARAMETER OF RUNREPORT WEBSERVICES API 7354798 - SEQUENCE ORDER OF PARAMETERS FOR THE RUNREPORT WEBSERVICES API 7358973 - PARALLEL SFTP DELIVERY FAILS DUE TO SSHEXCEPTION: CORRUPT MAC ON INPUT 7370110 - REGN:FAIL WHEN USE JNDI TO XMLDB REPORT REPOSITORY 7375859 - NEW WEBSERVICE REQUIRED FOR RUNREPORT 7375892 - REQUIRE NEW WEBSERVICE TO CHECK IF REPORTFOLDER EXISTS 7377686 - TEXT-ALIGN NOT APPLIED IN PDF IN HEBREW LOCALE 7413722 - RUNREPORT API DOES NOT PASS BACK ANY GENERATED EXCEPTIONS TO SCHEDULEREPORT 7435420 - FUSION CURRENCY: SUPPORT MICROSOFT(JAVA) FORMAT MASK WITH CURRENCY 7441486 - ER: ADD PARAMETER FOR SFTP TO BURSTING QUERY 7458169 - SSO WITH OID LDAP COULD NOT FETCH OID ROLES 7461161 - EMAIL DELIVERY FAILS - DELIVERYEXCEPTION: 0 BYTE AVAILABLE IN THE GIVEN INPU 7580715 - INCORRECT FORMATTING OF DATES IN TIMEZONE GMT+13 7582694 - INVALID MAXWIDTH VALUE CAUSES NLS FAILURES 7583693 - JAVA.LANG.NULLPOINTEREXCEPTION RAISED WHEN GENERATING HRMS BENEFITS PDF REPORT 7587998 - NEWLY CREATED USERS IN OID CANT ACCESS REPORTS UNTILL BI PUBLISHER IS RESTARTED 7588317 - TABLE OF CONTENT ALWAYS IN THE SAME FONT 7590084 - REMOVING THE BIP ENTERPRISE BANNER BUT KEEPING THE REPORTS & SCHEDULES TAB 7590112 - SOMEONE NOT PRIVILEGED ACCESS BIP DIRECTLY SHOULD GET A CUSTOM PAGE 7590125 - AUTOMATING CREATION OF USERS AND ROLES 7597902 - TIMEZONE SUPPORT IN RUNREPORT WEBSERVICE API 7599031 - XML PUBLISHER SUM(CURRENT-GROUP()) FAILS 7609178 - ISSUE WITH TAGS EXTRACTED FROM RTF TEMPLATE 7613024 - HEADER/FOOTER SETTINGS OF RTF TEMPLATE ARE NOT RETAINING IN THE RTF OUTPUT 7623988 - ADD XSLT FUNCTION TO PRINT XDO PROPERTIES 7625975 - RETRIEVING PARAMETER LOV FROM RTF TEMPLATE 7629445 - SPELL OUT A NUMBER INTO WORDS 7641827 - ANALYTICS FROZED AFTER PAGE TAB WHICH INCLUDES [BI PUBLISHER REPORT] WERE CLICKE 7645504 - BIP REPORT FROZED AFTER THE SAME DASHBOARD BIP REPORTS WERE CLICKED SIMULTANEOUS 7649561 - RECEIVE 'TO MANY OPEN FILE HANDLES' ERROR CAUSING BI TO CRASH 7654155 - BIP REMOVES THE FIRST FILE SEPARATOR WHEN RE-ENTER REPOSITORY LOCATION IN ADMIN 7656834 - NEED AN OPTION TO NOT APPEND SCHEMA NAME IN GENERATED QUERY 7660292 - ER: XDOPARSER UPGRADE TO XDK 11G 7687862 - BIP DATA EXTRACTING ENHANCEMENT FOR SIEBEL BIP INTEGRATION 7694875 - ADMINISTRATOR IS SUPER USER WHETHER CONFIGURED MANDATORY_USER_ROLE OR NOT 7697592 - BI PUBLISHER STRINGINDEXOUTOFBOUNDSEXCEPTION WHEN PRINTING LABEL FROM SIM 7702372 - ARABIC/ENGLISH NUMBER/DATE PROBLEM, TOTAL PAGE NUMBER NOT RENDERED IN ENGLISH 7707987 - OUTOFMEMORY BURSTING A BI PUBLISHER REPORT BI SERVER DATA SOURCE 7712026 - ER: CHANGE CHART OUTPUT FORMAT TO PNG IN HTML OUTPUT 7833732 - THE 'SEARCH' PARAMETER TYPE CANNOT BE USED IN IE6 UNDER WINDOWS 8214839 - ER: INCREASE COLUMN SIZE IN SCHEDULER TABLE XMLP_SCHED_JOB 8218271 - ISSUES WHILE CONVERTING EXCEL TO XML 8218452 - BI PUBLISHER STANDALONE : GRAPHICS WITHOUT COLORS IF MORE THAN 33 PAGES 8250980 - USER WITH XMLP_ADMIN RESPONSIBILITY IS NOT ABLE TO EDIT REPORT IN BIP 8262410 - IMPOSSIBLE TO PRINT PDF CREATED BY BI PUBLISHER VIA 3RD PARTY PDF APPLICATION 8274369 - QA: CANNOT DELETE EMAIL SERVER UNDER DELIVERY CONFIGURATION 8284173 - FO:VISIBILITY="HIDDEN" DOESN'T WORK WITH FO:PAGE-NUMBER-CITATION 8288421 - THE VALUE OF VIEW BY GO BACK TO MY HISTORY IN SCHEDULES TAB 8299212 - REG: THE SPECIFICAL BI USER DIDN'T GET THE CORRECT REPORT HISTORY 8301767 - ORA-01795 ERROR OCCURED AFTER ACCESSING DASHBOARD PAGE WHICH INCLUDES BIP 8304944 - ADD SIEBEL SECURITY MODEL IN BI PUBLISHER 10.1.3.4.1 8312814 - QA:HOT:OBI SERVER JDBC DRIVER BIJDBC14.JAR IN XMLPSERVER.WAR IS INCORRECT 8323679 - BI PUBLISHER SENDS HTML REPORT TO OUTLOOK CLIENT AS ATTACHMENT NOT INLINE 8370794 - HISTORY OF COMPLETED SCHEDULER JOBS STILL SHOW ONE AS RUNNING ON CLUSTER ENV 8390970 - OUT OF MEMORY EXCEPTION RAISED, WHILE SAVING THE DATA 8393681 - CHECKBOX IS SHOWING UP AS CHECKED WHEN DATA IS NOT CHECKED VALUE 8725450 - UIX 2.3.6.6 UPTAKE FOR 10.1.3.4.1 UIX fixes: 6866363 - SUPPORT FOR JAVA DATE FORMAT AS PER JDK 1.4 AND ABOVE 6829124 - DATE PARAMETER NOT HANDLING DATE OFFSET AS PER JAVA STANDARDS ---------------------------- INSTALLATION FOR ENTERPRISE ---------------------------- Upgrade from 10.1.3.4.0d (patch 8284524, 8398280) and 10.1.3.4.1 does not require step 8 and step 9. 1 - Make a backup copy of the xmlp-server-config.xml file located in <application installation>/WEB-INF/ directory, where your application server unpacked the BI Publisher war or ear file. Example: In an Oracle AS/OC4J 10.1.3 deployment, the location is <ORACLE_HOME>/j2ee/home/applications/xmlpserver/xmlpserver/WEB-INF/xmlp-server-config.xml 2 - Back up all the directories under the BI Publisher repository (for example: {Oracle_Home}/xmlp/XMLP). 3 - If you are using Scheduling, back up your existing BI Publisher Scheduler schema. 4 - Shut down BI Publisher. 5 - Undeploy the BI Publisher application ("xmlpserver") from your J2EE application server. See your application server documentation for instructions how to undeploy an application. 6 - Deploy the 10.1.3.4 xmlpserver.ear or xmlpserver.war to your application server. See "Manually Installing BI Publisher to Your J2EE Application Server" secition of BI Publisher Installation Guide for guidelines for your application server type. 7 - Copy the saved backup copy of the xmlp-server-config.xml file from step 1 to the newly created BI Publisher <application installation>/WEB-INF/ directory, where your application server unpacked the BI Publisher war or ear file. Example: In an Oracle AS/OC4J 10.1.3 deployment, the location is <ORACLE_HOME>/j2ee/home/applications/xmlpserver/xmlpserver/WEB-INF/xmlp-server-config.xml 8 - Copy ssodefaults.xml to the following directory. And replace [host]:[port] with your server's information. Default values for other properties can be updated depending on your configuration. <Existing Repository>\XMLP\Admin\Security 9 - Copy database-config.xml to the following directory. <Existing Repository>\XMLP\Admin\Scheduler 10 - Restart xmlpserver application or Application Server ---------------------------------- IBM WEBSPHERE 6.1 DEPLOYMENT NOTE ---------------------------------- When users fail to log on to BI Publisher with "HTTP 500 Internal Server Error" on WebSphere 6.1, you must change Class Loader configuration to avoid the error. (bug7506253 - XMLPSERVER WON'T START AFTER DEPLOYMENT TO WEBSPHERE 6.1) SystemErr.log: java.lang.VerifyError: class loading constraint violated (class: oracle/xml/parser/v2/XMLNode method: xdkSetQxName(Loracle/xml/util/QxName;)V) at pc: 0 .... Class Loader Configuration Steps: 1 - Login to WebSphere Admin console. Click Enterprise Applications under Applications menu 2 - Click xmlpserver application name from the list 3 - Select "Class loading and update detection" 4 - Update class loader configuration as follows in Class Loader -> General Properties * Polling interval for updated files: [0] Seconds * Class loader order: [x] Classes loaded with application class loader first * WAR class loader policy: [x] Single class loader for application 5 - Apply this change and save the new configuration. 6 - Restart xmlpserver application Please refer to WebSphere 6.1 documentation for more details. "http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/wasinfo/v6r1/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.websphere.base.doc/info/aes/ae/trun_classload_entapp.html"> http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/wasinfo/v6r1/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.websphere.base.doc/info/aes/ae/trun_classload_entapp.html ------------------------------------------------------- Oracle WebLogic Server 11g R1 (10.3.1) Deployment NOTE ------------------------------------------------------- If you are deploying BI Publisher to WebLogic Server 10.3.1, you must add the following setting at startup for the domain that contains the BI Publisher server in the /weblogic_home/user_projects/domains/base_domain/bin/startWebLogic.sh script : -Dtoplink.xml.platform=oracle.toplink.platform.xml.jaxp.JAXPPlatform This setting is required to enable BI Publisher to find the TopLink JAR files to create the Scheduler tables.

  Read the article

• HTG Reviews the CODE Keyboard: Old School Construction Meets Modern Amenities

  - by Jason Fitzpatrick

  There’s nothing quite as satisfying as the smooth and crisp action of a well built keyboard. If you’re tired of  mushy keys and cheap feeling keyboards, a well-constructed mechanical keyboard is a welcome respite from the $10 keyboard that came with your computer. Read on as we put the CODE mechanical keyboard through the paces. What is the CODE Keyboard? The CODE keyboard is a collaboration between manufacturer WASD Keyboards and Jeff Atwood of Coding Horror (the guy behind the Stack Exchange network and Discourse forum software). Atwood’s focus was incorporating the best of traditional mechanical keyboards and the best of modern keyboard usability improvements. In his own words: The world is awash in terrible, crappy, no name how-cheap-can-we-make-it keyboards. There are a few dozen better mechanical keyboard options out there. I’ve owned and used at least six different expensive mechanical keyboards, but I wasn’t satisfied with any of them, either: they didn’t have backlighting, were ugly, had terrible design, or were missing basic functions like media keys. That’s why I originally contacted Weyman Kwong of WASD Keyboards way back in early 2012. I told him that the state of keyboards was unacceptable to me as a geek, and I proposed a partnership wherein I was willing to work with him to do whatever it takes to produce a truly great mechanical keyboard. Even the ardent skeptic who questions whether Atwood has indeed created a truly great mechanical keyboard certainly can’t argue with the position he starts from: there are so many agonizingly crappy keyboards out there. Even worse, in our opinion, is that unless you’re a typist of a certain vintage there’s a good chance you’ve never actually typed on a really nice keyboard. Those that didn’t start using computers until the mid-to-late 1990s most likely have always typed on modern mushy-key keyboards and never known the joy of typing on a really responsive and crisp mechanical keyboard. Is our preference for and love of mechanical keyboards shining through here? Good. We’re not even going to try and hide it. So where does the CODE keyboard stack up in pantheon of keyboards? Read on as we walk you through the simple setup and our experience using the CODE. Setting Up the CODE Keyboard Although the setup of the CODE keyboard is essentially plug and play, there are two distinct setup steps that you likely haven’t had to perform on a previous keyboard. Both highlight the degree of care put into the keyboard and the amount of customization available. Inside the box you’ll find the keyboard, a micro USB cable, a USB-to-PS2 adapter, and a tool which you may be unfamiliar with: a key puller. We’ll return to the key puller in a moment. Unlike the majority of keyboards on the market, the cord isn’t permanently affixed to the keyboard. What does this mean for you? Aside from the obvious need to plug it in yourself, it makes it dead simple to repair your own keyboard cord if it gets attacked by a pet, mangled in a mechanism on your desk, or otherwise damaged. It also makes it easy to take advantage of the cable routing channels in on the underside of the keyboard to  route your cable exactly where you want it. While we’re staring at the underside of the keyboard, check out those beefy rubber feet. By peripherals standards they’re huge (and there is six instead of the usual four). Once you plunk the keyboard down where you want it, it might as well be glued down the rubber feet work so well. After you’ve secured the cable and adjusted it to your liking, there is one more task  before plug the keyboard into the computer. On the bottom left-hand side of the keyboard, you’ll find a small recess in the plastic with some dip switches inside: The dip switches are there to switch hardware functions for various operating systems, keyboard layouts, and to enable/disable function keys. By toggling the dip switches you can change the keyboard from QWERTY mode to Dvorak mode and Colemak mode, the two most popular alternative keyboard configurations. You can also use the switches to enable Mac-functionality (for Command/Option keys). One of our favorite little toggles is the SW3 dip switch: you can disable the Caps Lock key; goodbye accidentally pressing Caps when you mean to press Shift. You can review the entire dip switch configuration chart here. The quick-start for Windows users is simple: double check that all the switches are in the off position (as seen in the photo above) and then simply toggle SW6 on to enable the media and backlighting function keys (this turns the menu key on the keyboard into a function key as typically found on laptop keyboards). After adjusting the dip switches to your liking, plug the keyboard into an open USB port on your computer (or into your PS/2 port using the included adapter). Design, Layout, and Backlighting The CODE keyboard comes in two flavors, a traditional 87-key layout (no number pad) and a traditional 104-key layout (number pad on the right hand side). We identify the layout as traditional because, despite some modern trapping and sneaky shortcuts, the actual form factor of the keyboard from the shape of the keys to the spacing and position is as classic as it comes. You won’t have to learn a new keyboard layout and spend weeks conditioning yourself to a smaller than normal backspace key or a PgUp/PgDn pair in an unconventional location. Just because the keyboard is very conventional in layout, however, doesn’t mean you’ll be missing modern amenities like media-control keys. The following additional functions are hidden in the F11, F12, Pause button, and the 2×6 grid formed by the Insert and Delete rows: keyboard illumination brightness, keyboard illumination on/off, mute, and then the typical play/pause, forward/backward, stop, and volume +/- in Insert and Delete rows, respectively. While we weren’t sure what we’d think of the function-key system at first (especially after retiring a Microsoft Sidewinder keyboard with a huge and easily accessible volume knob on it), it took less than a day for us to adapt to using the Fn key, located next to the right Ctrl key, to adjust our media playback on the fly. Keyboard backlighting is a largely hit-or-miss undertaking but the CODE keyboard nails it. Not only does it have pleasant and easily adjustable through-the-keys lighting but the key switches the keys themselves are attached to are mounted to a steel plate with white paint. Enough of the light reflects off the interior cavity of the keys and then diffuses across the white plate to provide nice even illumination in between the keys. Highlighting the steel plate beneath the keys brings us to the actual construction of the keyboard. It’s rock solid. The 87-key model, the one we tested, is 2.0 pounds. The 104-key is nearly a half pound heavier at 2.42 pounds. Between the steel plate, the extra-thick PCB board beneath the steel plate, and the thick ABS plastic housing, the keyboard has very solid feel to it. Combine that heft with the previously mentioned thick rubber feet and you have a tank-like keyboard that won’t budge a millimeter during normal use. Examining The Keys This is the section of the review the hardcore typists and keyboard ninjas have been waiting for. We’ve looked at the layout of the keyboard, we’ve looked at the general construction of it, but what about the actual keys? There are a wide variety of keyboard construction techniques but the vast majority of modern keyboards use a rubber-dome construction. The key is floated in a plastic frame over a rubber membrane that has a little rubber dome for each key. The press of the physical key compresses the rubber dome downwards and a little bit of conductive material on the inside of the dome’s apex connects with the circuit board. Despite the near ubiquity of the design, many people dislike it. The principal complaint is that dome keyboards require a complete compression to register a keystroke; keyboard designers and enthusiasts refer to this as “bottoming out”. In other words, the register the “b” key, you need to completely press that key down. As such it slows you down and requires additional pressure and movement that, over the course of tens of thousands of keystrokes, adds up to a whole lot of wasted time and fatigue. The CODE keyboard features key switches manufactured by Cherry, a company that has manufactured key switches since the 1960s. Specifically the CODE features Cherry MX Clear switches. These switches feature the same classic design of the other Cherry switches (such as the MX Blue and Brown switch lineups) but they are significantly quieter (yes this is a mechanical keyboard, but no, your neighbors won’t think you’re firing off a machine gun) as they lack the audible click found in most Cherry switches. This isn’t to say that they keyboard doesn’t have a nice audible key press sound when the key is fully depressed, but that the key mechanism isn’t doesn’t create a loud click sound when triggered. One of the great features of the Cherry MX clear is a tactile “bump” that indicates the key has been compressed enough to register the stroke. For touch typists the very subtle tactile feedback is a great indicator that you can move on to the next stroke and provides a welcome speed boost. Even if you’re not trying to break any word-per-minute records, that little bump when pressing the key is satisfying. The Cherry key switches, in addition to providing a much more pleasant typing experience, are also significantly more durable than dome-style key switch. Rubber dome switch membrane keyboards are typically rated for 5-10 million contacts whereas the Cherry mechanical switches are rated for 50 million contacts. You’d have to write the next War and Peace  and follow that up with A Tale of Two Cities: Zombie Edition, and then turn around and transcribe them both into a dozen different languages to even begin putting a tiny dent in the lifecycle of this keyboard. So what do the switches look like under the classicly styled keys? You can take a look yourself with the included key puller. Slide the loop between the keys and then gently beneath the key you wish to remove: Wiggle the key puller gently back and forth while exerting a gentle upward pressure to pop the key off; You can repeat the process for every key, if you ever find yourself needing to extract piles of cat hair, Cheeto dust, or other foreign objects from your keyboard. There it is, the naked switch, the source of that wonderful crisp action with the tactile bump on each keystroke. The last feature worthy of a mention is the N-key rollover functionality of the keyboard. This is a feature you simply won’t find on non-mechanical keyboards and even gaming keyboards typically only have any sort of key roller on the high-frequency keys like WASD. So what is N-key rollover and why do you care? On a typical mass-produced rubber-dome keyboard you cannot simultaneously press more than two keys as the third one doesn’t register. PS/2 keyboards allow for unlimited rollover (in other words you can’t out type the keyboard as all of your keystrokes, no matter how fast, will register); if you use the CODE keyboard with the PS/2 adapter you gain this ability. If you don’t use the PS/2 adapter and use the native USB, you still get 6-key rollover (and the CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT don’t count towards the 6) so realistically you still won’t be able to out type the computer as even the more finger twisting keyboard combos and high speed typing will still fall well within the 6-key rollover. The rollover absolutely doesn’t matter if you’re a slow hunt-and-peck typist, but if you’ve read this far into a keyboard review there’s a good chance that you’re a serious typist and that kind of quality construction and high-number key rollover is a fantastic feature.  The Good, The Bad, and the Verdict We’ve put the CODE keyboard through the paces, we’ve played games with it, typed articles with it, left lengthy comments on Reddit, and otherwise used and abused it like we would any other keyboard. The Good: The construction is rock solid. In an emergency, we’re confident we could use the keyboard as a blunt weapon (and then resume using it later in the day with no ill effect on the keyboard). The Cherry switches are an absolute pleasure to type on; the Clear variety found in the CODE keyboard offer a really nice middle-ground between the gun-shot clack of a louder mechanical switch and the quietness of a lesser-quality dome keyboard without sacrificing quality. Touch typists will love the subtle tactile bump feedback. Dip switch system makes it very easy for users on different systems and with different keyboard layout needs to switch between operating system and keyboard layouts. If you’re investing a chunk of change in a keyboard it’s nice to know you can take it with you to a different operating system or “upgrade” it to a new layout if you decide to take up Dvorak-style typing. The backlighting is perfect. You can adjust it from a barely-visible glow to a blazing light-up-the-room brightness. Whatever your intesity preference, the white-coated steel backplate does a great job diffusing the light between the keys. You can easily remove the keys for cleaning (or to rearrange the letters to support a new keyboard layout). The weight of the unit combined with the extra thick rubber feet keep it planted exactly where you place it on the desk. The Bad: While you’re getting your money’s worth, the $150 price tag is a shock when compared to the $20-60 price tags you find on lower-end keyboards. People used to large dedicated media keys independent of the traditional key layout (such as the large buttons and volume controls found on many modern keyboards) might be off put by the Fn-key style media controls on the CODE. The Verdict: The keyboard is clearly and heavily influenced by the needs of serious typists. Whether you’re a programmer, transcriptionist, or just somebody that wants to leave the lengthiest article comments the Internet has ever seen, the CODE keyboard offers a rock solid typing experience. Yes, $150 isn’t pocket change, but the quality of the CODE keyboard is so high and the typing experience is so enjoyable, you’re easily getting ten times the value you’d get out of purchasing a lesser keyboard. Even compared to other mechanical keyboards on the market, like the Das Keyboard, you’re still getting more for your money as other mechanical keyboards don’t come with the lovely-to-type-on Cherry MX Clear switches, back lighting, and hardware-based operating system keyboard layout switching. If it’s in your budget to upgrade your keyboard (especially if you’ve been slogging along with a low-end rubber-dome keyboard) there’s no good reason to not pickup a CODE keyboard. Key animation courtesy of Geekhack.org user Lethal Squirrel.       

  Read the article

• any clue in these logs why keyboard audio and internet are messed up

  - by mmj

  Jun 7 00:01:18 Isis lightdm: pam_unix(lightdm-autologin:session): session opened for user mimi by (uid=0) Jun 7 00:01:18 Isis lightdm: pam_ck_connector(lightdm-autologin:session): nox11 mode, ignoring PAM_TTY :0 Jun 7 00:01:26 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Registered Authentication Agent for unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 (system bus name :1.36 [/usr/lib/policykit-1-gnome/polkit-gnome-authentication-agent-1], object path /org/gnome/PolicyKit1/AuthenticationAgent, locale zh_CN.UTF-8) Jun 7 00:01:29 Isis dbus[610]: [system] Rejected send message, 2 matched rules; type="method_call", sender=":1.44" (uid=1000 pid=1763 comm="/usr/lib/indicator-datetime/indicator-datetime-ser") interface="org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties" member="GetAll" error name="(unset)" requested_reply="0" destination=":1.15" (uid=0 pid=1219 comm="/usr/sbin/console-kit-daemon --no-daemon ") Jun 7 00:07:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): authentication failure; logname=mimi uid=1000 euid=0 tty=/dev/pts/1 ruser=mimi rhost= user=mimi Jun 7 00:08:11 Isis sudo: mimi : TTY=pts/1 ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/add-apt-repository ppa:colingille/freshlight Jun 7 00:08:11 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session opened for user root by mimi(uid=1000) Jun 7 00:08:32 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 00:11:20 Isis sudo: mimi : TTY=pts/1 ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/apt-get install gparted Jun 7 00:11:20 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session opened for user root by mimi(uid=1000) Jun 7 00:11:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 00:17:02 Isis CRON[2651]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 00:17:02 Isis CRON[2651]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 00:17:32 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain ONE-SHOT authorization for action com.ubuntu.pkexec.gparted for unix-process:2655:96838 [/bin/sh /usr/bin/gparted-pkexec] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 00:17:32 Isis pkexec: pam_unix(polkit-1:session): session opened for user root by (uid=1000) Jun 7 00:17:32 Isis pkexec: pam_ck_connector(polkit-1:session): cannot determine display-device Jun 7 00:17:32 Isis pkexec[2657]: mimi: Executing command [USER=root] [TTY=unknown] [CWD=/home/mimi] [COMMAND=/usr/sbin/gparted] Jun 7 00:48:15 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain ONE-SHOT authorization for action com.ubuntu.pkexec.gparted for unix-process:3813:281120 [/bin/sh /usr/bin/gparted-pkexec] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 00:48:15 Isis pkexec: pam_unix(polkit-1:session): session opened for user root by (uid=1000) Jun 7 00:48:15 Isis pkexec: pam_ck_connector(polkit-1:session): cannot determine display-device Jun 7 00:48:15 Isis pkexec[3815]: mimi: Executing command [USER=root] [TTY=unknown] [CWD=/home/mimi] [COMMAND=/usr/sbin/gparted] Jun 7 01:17:01 Isis CRON[3960]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 01:17:01 Isis CRON[3960]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 02:08:52 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: gkr-pam: unlocked login keyring Jun 7 02:17:01 Isis CRON[4246]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 02:17:01 Isis CRON[4246]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 02:17:05 Isis sudo: mimi : TTY=pts/1 ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/apt-get install unetbootin Jun 7 02:17:05 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session opened for user root by mimi(uid=1000) Jun 7 02:17:57 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin 'rootcheck=no' Jun 7 02:18:59 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin 'rootcheck=no' Jun 7 02:19:26 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin 'rootcheck=no' Jun 7 02:33:21 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 02:40:04 Isis sudo: mimi : TTY=pts/1 ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin rootcheck=no Jun 7 02:40:04 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session opened for user root by mimi(uid=1000) Jun 7 03:17:01 Isis CRON[5506]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 03:17:01 Isis CRON[5506]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 03:33:24 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=pts/1 ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin showall=yes 'rootcheck=no' Jun 7 03:33:43 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 04:17:01 Isis CRON[6119]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 04:17:01 Isis CRON[6119]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 04:18:35 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain TEMPORARY authorization for action org.debian.apt.install-or-remove-packages for system-bus-name::1.79 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-ui-install] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:19:11 Isis groupadd[6702]: group added to /etc/group: name=landscape, GID=127 Jun 7 04:19:11 Isis groupadd[6702]: group added to /etc/gshadow: name=landscape Jun 7 04:19:11 Isis groupadd[6702]: new group: name=landscape, GID=127 Jun 7 04:19:11 Isis useradd[6706]: new user: name=landscape, UID=115, GID=127, home=/var/lib/landscape, shell=/bin/false Jun 7 04:19:12 Isis usermod[6711]: change user 'landscape' password Jun 7 04:19:12 Isis chage[6716]: changed password expiry for landscape Jun 7 04:19:37 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:6146:1543697 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:20:20 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:6832:1555313 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:21:04 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.ubuntu.languageselector.setsystemdefaultlanguage for unix-process:6827:1555123 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:21:08 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.ubuntu.languageselector.setsystemdefaultlanguage for unix-process:6827:1555123 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:21:44 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action org.debian.apt.install-or-remove-packages for system-bus-name::1.87 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:22:27 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain TEMPORARY authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:7830:1567424 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:25:50 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.ubuntu.languageselector.setsystemdefaultlanguage for unix-process:7876:1584865 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 04:25:52 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.ubuntu.languageselector.setsystemdefaultlanguage for unix-process:7876:1584865 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 05:11:57 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain TEMPORARY authorization for action org.debian.apt.install-or-remove-packages for system-bus-name::1.95 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/gnome-language-selector] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 05:17:02 Isis CRON[8708]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 05:17:02 Isis CRON[8708]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 05:28:03 Isis lightdm: pam_unix(lightdm-autologin:session): session opened for user mimi by (uid=0) Jun 7 05:28:03 Isis lightdm: pam_ck_connector(lightdm-autologin:session): nox11 mode, ignoring PAM_TTY :0 Jun 7 05:28:17 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Registered Authentication Agent for unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 (system bus name :1.32 [/usr/lib/policykit-1-gnome/polkit-gnome-authentication-agent-1], object path /org/gnome/PolicyKit1/AuthenticationAgent, locale en_US.UTF-8) Jun 7 05:28:32 Isis dbus[660]: [system] Rejected send message, 2 matched rules; type="method_call", sender=":1.44" (uid=1000 pid=1736 comm="/usr/lib/indicator-datetime/indicator-datetime-ser") interface="org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties" member="GetAll" error name="(unset)" requested_reply="0" destination=":1.17" (uid=0 pid=1333 comm="/usr/sbin/console-kit-daemon --no-daemon ") Jun 7 06:17:01 Isis CRON[2391]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 06:17:02 Isis CRON[2391]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 06:25:02 Isis CRON[2492]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 06:25:02 Isis CRON[2492]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 07:17:01 Isis CRON[3174]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 07:17:01 Isis CRON[3174]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 07:30:01 Isis CRON[3397]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 07:30:01 Isis CRON[3397]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/share/checkbox/backend --path=/usr/share/checkbox/scripts:/usr/lib/lightdm/lightdm:/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/games /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/input /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/output Jun 7 08:09:01 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/share/checkbox/backend --path=/usr/share/checkbox/scripts:/usr/lib/lightdm/lightdm:/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/games /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/input /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/output Jun 7 08:09:59 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/share/checkbox/backend --path=/usr/share/checkbox/scripts:/usr/lib/lightdm/lightdm:/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/games /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/input /tmp/checkboxQbuE6V/output Jun 7 08:10:55 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 08:17:01 Isis CRON[4215]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 08:17:01 Isis CRON[4215]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 09:17:02 Isis CRON[4766]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 09:17:02 Isis CRON[4766]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 10:17:02 Isis CRON[5046]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 10:17:02 Isis CRON[5046]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 11:17:02 Isis CRON[5325]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 11:17:02 Isis CRON[5325]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 12:17:01 Isis CRON[5617]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 12:17:01 Isis CRON[5617]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 13:07:51 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_unix(gnome-screensaver:auth): authentication failure; logname= uid=1000 euid=1000 tty=:0.0 ruser= rhost= user=mimi Jun 7 13:07:51 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_winbind(gnome-screensaver:auth): getting password (0x00000388) Jun 7 13:07:51 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_winbind(gnome-screensaver:auth): pam_get_item returned a password Jun 7 13:07:51 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_winbind(gnome-screensaver:auth): request wbcLogonUser failed: WBC_ERR_AUTH_ERROR, PAM error: PAM_USER_UNKNOWN (10), NTSTATUS: NT_STATUS_NO_SUCH_USER, Error message was: No such user Jun 7 13:08:03 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_unix(gnome-screensaver:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 13:08:03 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_unix(gnome-screensaver:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 13:08:03 Isis gnome-screensaver-dialog: pam_winbind(gnome-screensaver:auth): getting password (0x00000388) Jun 7 13:08:08 Isis lightdm: pam_unix(lightdm:session): session opened for user lightdm by (uid=0) Jun 7 13:08:08 Isis lightdm: pam_ck_connector(lightdm:session): nox11 mode, ignoring PAM_TTY :1 Jun 7 13:08:13 Isis lightdm: pam_succeed_if(lightdm:auth): requirement "user ingroup nopasswdlogin" not met by user "mimi" Jun 7 13:08:16 Isis dbus[660]: [system] Rejected send message, 2 matched rules; type="method_call", sender=":1.91" (uid=104 pid=5961 comm="/usr/lib/indicator-datetime/indicator-datetime-ser") interface="org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties" member="GetAll" error name="(unset)" requested_reply="0" destination=":1.17" (uid=0 pid=1333 comm="/usr/sbin/console-kit-daemon --no-daemon ") Jun 7 13:08:18 Isis dbus[660]: [system] Rejected send message, 2 matched rules; type="method_call", sender=":1.98" (uid=104 pid=5999 comm="/usr/lib/indicator-datetime/indicator-datetime-ser") interface="org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties" member="GetAll" error name="(unset)" requested_reply="0" destination=":1.17" (uid=0 pid=1333 comm="/usr/sbin/console-kit-daemon --no-daemon ") Jun 7 13:10:15 Isis lightdm: pam_unix(lightdm:session): session closed for user lightdm Jun 7 13:17:02 Isis CRON[6181]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 13:17:02 Isis CRON[6181]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): conversation failed Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: pam_unix(sudo:auth): auth could not identify password for [mimi] Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: mimi : 3 incorrect password attempts ; TTY=unknown ; PWD=/home/mimi ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/bin/unetbootin 'rootcheck=no' Jun 7 13:55:14 Isis sudo: unable to execute /usr/sbin/sendmail: No such file or directory Jun 7 14:02:33 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:6736:3087856 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 14:02:51 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 FAILED to authenticate to gain authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:6752:3089992 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 14:03:14 Isis polkitd(authority=local): Operator of unix-session:/org/freedesktop/ConsoleKit/Session1 successfully authenticated as unix-user:mimi to gain TEMPORARY authorization for action com.canonical.LandscapeClientSettings.configure for unix-process:6763:3092515 [/usr/bin/python /usr/bin/landscape-client-settings-ui] (owned by unix-user:mimi) Jun 7 14:17:01 Isis CRON[6933]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 14:17:01 Isis CRON[6933]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root Jun 7 15:17:02 Isis CRON[7611]: pam_unix(cron:session): session opened for user root by (uid=0) Jun 7 15:17:02 Isis CRON[7611]: pam_unix(cron:session): session closed for user root

  Read the article

• OIM 11g notification framework

  - by Rajesh G Kumar

  OIM 11g has introduced an improved and template based Notifications framework. New release has removed the limitation of sending text based emails (out-of-the-box emails) and enhanced to support html features. New release provides in-built out-of-the-box templates for events like 'Reset Password', 'Create User Self Service' , ‘User Deleted' etc. Also provides new APIs to support custom templates to send notifications out of OIM. OIM notification framework supports notification mechanism based on events, notification templates and template resolver. They are defined as follows: Ø Events are defined as XML file and imported as part of MDS database in order to make notification event available for use. Ø Notification templates are created using OIM advance administration console. The template contains the text and the substitution 'variables' which will be replaced with the data provided by the template resolver. Templates support internationalization and can be defined as HTML or in form of simple text. Ø Template resolver is a Java class that is responsible to provide attributes and data to be used at runtime and design time. It must be deployed following the OIM plug-in framework. Resolver data provided at design time is to be used by end user to design notification template with available entity variables and it also provides data at runtime to replace the designed variable with value to be displayed to recipients. Steps to define custom notifications in OIM 11g are: Steps# Steps 1. Define the Notification Event 2. Create the Custom Template Resolver class 3. Create Template with notification contents to be sent to recipients 4. Create Event triggering spots in OIM 1. Notification Event metadata The Notification Event is defined as XML file which need to be imported into MDS database. An event file must be compliant with the schema defined by the notification engine, which is NotificationEvent.xsd. The event file contains basic information about the event.XSD location in MDS database: “/metadata/iam-features-notification/NotificationEvent.xsd”Schema file can be viewed by exporting file from MDS using weblogicExportMetadata.sh script.Sample Notification event metadata definition: 1: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> 2: <Events xmlns:xsi=http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="../../../metadata/NotificationEvent.xsd"> 3: <EventType name="Sample Notification"> 4: <StaticData> 5: <Attribute DataType="X2-Entity" EntityName="User" Name="Granted User"/> 6: </StaticData> 7: <Resolver class="com.iam.oim.demo.notification.DemoNotificationResolver"> 8: <Param DataType="91-Entity" EntityName="Resource" Name="ResourceInfo"/> 9: </Resolver> 10: </EventType> 11: </Events> Line# Description 1. XML file notation tag 2. Events is root tag 3. EventType tag is to declare a unique event name which will be available for template designing 4. The StaticData element lists a set of parameters which allow user to add parameters that are not data dependent. In other words, this element defines the static data to be displayed when notification is to be configured. An example of static data is the User entity, which is not dependent on any other data and has the same set of attributes for all event instances and notification templates. Available attributes are used to be defined as substitution tokens in the template. 5. Attribute tag is child tag for StaticData to declare the entity and its data type with unique reference name. User entity is most commonly used Entity as StaticData. 6. StaticData closing tag 7. Resolver tag defines the resolver class. The Resolver class must be defined for each notification. It defines what parameters are available in the notification creation screen and how those parameters are replaced when the notification is to be sent. Resolver class resolves the data dynamically at run time and displays the attributes in the UI. 8. The Param DataType element lists a set of parameters which allow user to add parameters that are data dependent. An example of the data dependent or a dynamic entity is a resource object which user can select at run time. A notification template is to be configured for the resource object. Corresponding to the resource object field, a lookup is displayed on the UI. When a user selects the event the call goes to the Resolver class provided to fetch the fields that are displayed in the Available Data list, from which user can select the attribute to be used on the template. Param tag is child tag to declare the entity and its data type with unique reference name. 9. Resolver closing tag 10 EventType closing tag 11. Events closing tag Note: - DataType needs to be declared as “X2-Entity” for User entity and “91-Entity” for Resource or Organization entities. The dynamic entities supported for lookup are user, resource, and organization. Once notification event metadata is defined, need to be imported into MDS database. Fully qualified resolver class name need to be define for XML but do not need to load the class in OIM yet (it can be loaded later). 2. Coding the notification resolver All event owners have to provide a resolver class which would resolve the data dynamically at run time. Custom resolver class must implement the interface oracle.iam.notification.impl.NotificationEventResolver and override the implemented methods with actual implementation. It has 2 methods: S# Methods Descriptions 1. public List<NotificationAttribute> getAvailableData(String eventType, Map<String, Object> params); This API will return the list of available data variables. These variables will be available on the UI while creating/modifying the Templates and would let user select the variables so that they can be embedded as a token as part of the Messages on the template. These tokens are replaced by the value passed by the resolver class at run time. Available data is displayed in a list. The parameter "eventType" specifies the event Name for which template is to be read.The parameter "params" is the map which has the entity name and the corresponding value for which available data is to be fetched. Sample code snippet: List<NotificationAttribute> list = new ArrayList<NotificationAttribute>(); long objKey = (Long) params.get("resource"); //Form Field details based on Resource object key HashMap<String, Object> formFieldDetail = getObjectFormName(objKey); for (Iterator<?> itrd = formFieldDetail.entrySet().iterator(); itrd.hasNext(); ) { NotificationAttribute availableData = new NotificationAttribute(); Map.Entry formDetailEntrySet = (Entry<?, ?>)itrd.next(); String fieldLabel = (String)formDetailEntrySet.getValue(); availableData.setName(fieldLabel); list.add(availableData); } return list; 2. Public HashMap<String, Object> getReplacedData(String eventType, Map<String, Object> params); This API would return the resolved value of the variables present on the template at the runtime when notification is being sent. The parameter "eventType" specifies the event Name for which template is to be read.The parameter "params" is the map which has the base values such as usr_key, obj_key etc required by the resolver implementation to resolve the rest of the variables in the template. Sample code snippet: HashMap<String, Object> resolvedData = new HashMap<String, Object>();String firstName = getUserFirstname(params.get("usr_key"));resolvedData.put("fname", firstName); String lastName = getUserLastName(params.get("usr_key"));resolvedData.put("lname", lastname);resolvedData.put("count", "1 million");return resolvedData; This code must be deployed as per OIM 11g plug-in framework. The XML file defining the plug-in is as below: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <oimplugins xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"> <plugins pluginpoint="oracle.iam.notification.impl.NotificationEventResolver"> <plugin pluginclass= " com.iam.oim.demo.notification.DemoNotificationResolver" version="1.0" name="Sample Notification Resolver"/> </plugins> </oimplugins> 3. Defining the template To create a notification template: Log in to the Oracle Identity Administration Click the System Management tab and then click the Notification tab From the Actions list on the left pane, select Create On the Create page, enter values for the following fields under the Template Information section: Template Name: Demo template Description Text: Demo template Under the Event Details section, perform the following: From the Available Event list, select the event for which the notification template is to be created from a list of available events. Depending on your selection, other fields are displayed in the Event Details section. Note that the template Sample Notification Event created in the previous step being used as the notification event. The contents of the Available Data drop down are based on the event XML StaticData tag, the drop down basically lists all the attributes of the entities defined in that tag. Once you select an element in the drop down, it will show up in the Selected Data text field and then you can just copy it and paste it into either the message subject or the message body fields prefixing $ symbol. Example if list has attribute like First_Name then message body will contains this as $First_Name which resolver will parse and replace it with actual value at runtime. In the Resource field, select a resource from the lookup. This is the dynamic data defined by the Param DataType element in the XML definition. Based on selected resource getAvailableData method of resolver will be called to fetch the resource object attribute detail, if method is overridden with required implementation. For current scenario, Map<String, Object> params will get populated with object key as value and key as “resource” in the map. This is the only input will be provided to resolver at design time. You need to implement the further logic to fetch the object attributes detail to populate the available Data list. List string should not have space in between, if object attributes has space for attribute name then implement logic to replace the space with ‘_’ before populating the list. Example if attribute name is “First Name” then make it “First_Name” and populate the list. Space is not supported while you try to parse and replace the token at run time with real value. Make a note that the Available Data and Selected Data are used in the substitution tokens definition only, they do not define the final data that will be sent in the notification. OIM will invoke the resolver class to get the data and make the substitutions. Under the Locale Information section, enter values in the following fields: To specify a form of encoding, select either UTF-8 or ASCII. In the Message Subject field, enter a subject for the notification. From the Type options, select the data type in which you want to send the message. You can choose between HTML and Text/Plain. In the Short Message field, enter a gist of the message in very few words. In the Long Message field, enter the message that will be sent as the notification with Available data token which need to be replaced by resolver at runtime. After you have entered the required values in all the fields, click Save. A message is displayed confirming the creation of the notification template. Click OK 4. Triggering the event A notification event can be triggered from different places in OIM. The logic behind the triggering must be coded and plugged into OIM. Examples of triggering points for notifications: Event handlers: post process notifications for specific data updates in OIM users Process tasks: to notify the users that a provisioning task was executed by OIM Scheduled tasks: to notify something related to the task The scheduled job has two parameters: Template Name: defines the notification template to be sent User Login: defines the user record that will provide the data to be sent in the notification Sample Code Snippet: public void execute(String templateName , String userId) { try { NotificationService notService = Platform.getService(NotificationService.class); NotificationEvent eventToSend=this.createNotificationEvent(templateName,userId); notService.notify(eventToSend); } catch (Exception e) { e.printStackTrace(); } } private NotificationEvent createNotificationEvent(String poTemplateName, String poUserId) { NotificationEvent event = new NotificationEvent(); String[] receiverUserIds= { poUserId }; event.setUserIds(receiverUserIds); event.setTemplateName(poTemplateName); event.setSender(null); HashMap<String, Object> templateParams = new HashMap<String, Object>(); templateParams.put("USER_LOGIN",poUserId); event.setParams(templateParams); return event; } public HashMap getAttributes() { return null; } public void setAttributes() {} }

  Read the article

• Metro: Introduction to CSS 3 Grid Layout

  - by Stephen.Walther

  The purpose of this blog post is to provide you with a quick introduction to the new W3C CSS 3 Grid Layout standard. You can use CSS Grid Layout in Metro style applications written with JavaScript to lay out the content of an HTML page. CSS Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without requiring you to actually use any HTML table elements. Doing Page Layouts without Tables Back in the 1990’s, if you wanted to create a fancy website, then you would use HTML tables for layout. For example, if you wanted to create a standard three-column page layout then you would create an HTML table with three columns like this: <table height="100%"> <tr> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="red"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </td> <td valign="top" bgcolor="green"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </td> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="blue"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </td> </tr> </table> When the table above gets rendered out to a browser, you end up with the following three-column layout: The width of the left and right columns is fixed – the width of the middle column expands or contracts depending on the width of the browser. Sometime around the year 2005, everyone decided that using tables for layout was a bad idea. Instead of using tables for layout — it was collectively decided by the spirit of the Web — you should use Cascading Style Sheets instead. Why is using HTML tables for layout bad? Using tables for layout breaks the semantics of the TABLE element. A TABLE element should be used only for displaying tabular information such as train schedules or moon phases. Using tables for layout is bad for accessibility (The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 1.0 is explicit about this) and using tables for layout is bad for separating content from layout (see http://CSSZenGarden.com). Post 2005, anyone who used HTML tables for layout were encouraged to hold their heads down in shame. That’s all well and good, but the problem with using CSS for layout is that it can be more difficult to work with CSS than HTML tables. For example, to achieve a standard three-column layout, you either need to use absolute positioning or floats. Here’s a three-column layout with floats: <style type="text/css"> #container { min-width: 800px; } #leftColumn { float: left; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { background-color:green; height: 100%; } #rightColumn { float: right; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:blue; } </style> <div id="container"> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> </div> The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIV. The leftColumn DIV element is floated to the left and the rightColumn DIV element is floated to the right. Notice that the rightColumn DIV appears in the page before the middleColumn DIV – this unintuitive ordering is necessary to get the floats to work correctly (see http://stackoverflow.com/questions/533607/css-three-column-layout-problem). The page above (almost) works with the most recent versions of most browsers. For example, you get the correct three-column layout in both Firefox and Chrome: And the layout mostly works with Internet Explorer 9 except for the fact that for some strange reason the min-width doesn’t work so when you shrink the width of your browser, you can get the following unwanted layout: Notice how the middle column (the green column) bleeds to the left and right. People have solved these issues with more complicated CSS. For example, see: http://matthewjamestaylor.com/blog/holy-grail-no-quirks-mode.htm But, at this point, no one could argue that using CSS is easier or more intuitive than tables. It takes work to get a layout with CSS and we know that we could achieve the same layout more easily using HTML tables. Using CSS Grid Layout CSS Grid Layout is a new W3C standard which provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without the disadvantage of using an HTML TABLE element. In other words, CSS Grid Layout enables you to perform table layouts using pure Cascading Style Sheets. The CSS Grid Layout standard is still in a “Working Draft” state (it is not finalized) and it is located here: http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ The CSS Grid Layout standard is only supported by Internet Explorer 10 and there are no signs that any browser other than Internet Explorer will support this standard in the near future. This means that it is only practical to take advantage of CSS Grid Layout when building Metro style applications with JavaScript. Here’s how you can create a standard three-column layout using a CSS Grid Layout: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> </div> </body> </html> When the page above is rendered in Internet Explorer 10, you get a standard three-column layout: The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn DIV, middleColumn DIV, and rightColumn DIV. The container DIV is set to Grid display mode with the following CSS rule: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } The display property is set to the value “-ms-grid”. This property causes the container DIV to lay out its child elements in a grid. (Notice that you use “-ms-grid” instead of “grid”. The “-ms-“ prefix is used because the CSS Grid Layout standard is still preliminary. This implementation only works with IE10 and it might change before the final release.) The grid columns and rows are defined with the “-ms-grid-columns” and “-ms-grid-rows” properties. The style rule above creates a grid with three columns and one row. The left and right columns are fixed sized at 300 pixels. The middle column sizes automatically depending on the remaining space available. The leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIVs are positioned within the container grid element with the following CSS rules: #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } The “-ms-grid-column” property is used to specify the column associated with the element selected by the style sheet selector. The leftColumn DIV is positioned in the first grid column, the middleColumn DIV is positioned in the second grid column, and the rightColumn DIV is positioned in the third grid column. I find using CSS Grid Layout to be just as intuitive as using an HTML table for layout. You define your columns and rows and then you position different elements within these columns and rows. Very straightforward. Creating Multiple Columns and Rows In the previous section, we created a super simple three-column layout. This layout contained only a single row. In this section, let’s create a slightly more complicated layout which contains more than one row: The following page contains a header row, a content row, and a footer row. The content row contains three columns: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:blue; } #footer { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 3; background-color: orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="header"> Header, Header, Header </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="footer"> Footer, Footer, Footer </div> </div> </body> </html> In the page above, the grid layout is created with the following rule which creates a grid with three rows and three columns: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } The header is created with the following rule: #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } The header is positioned in column 1 and row 1. Furthermore, notice that the “-ms-grid-column-span” property is used to span the header across three columns. CSS Grid Layout and Fractional Units When you use CSS Grid Layout, you can take advantage of fractional units. Fractional units provide you with an easy way of dividing up remaining space in a page. Imagine, for example, that you want to create a three-column page layout. You want the size of the first column to be fixed at 200 pixels and you want to divide the remaining space among the remaining three columns. The width of the second column is equal to the combined width of the third and fourth columns. The following CSS rule creates four columns with the desired widths: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } The fr unit represents a fraction. The grid above contains four columns. The second column is two times the size (2fr) of the third (1fr) and fourth (1fr) columns. When you use the fractional unit, the remaining space is divided up using fractional amounts. Notice that the single row is set to a height of 1fr. The single grid row gobbles up the entire vertical space. Here’s the entire HTML page: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } #firstColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #secondColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #thirdColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } #fourthColumn { -ms-grid-column: 4; background-color:orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="firstColumn"> First Column, First Column, First Column </div> <div id="secondColumn"> Second Column, Second Column, Second Column </div> <div id="thirdColumn"> Third Column, Third Column, Third Column </div> <div id="fourthColumn"> Fourth Column, Fourth Column, Fourth Column </div> </div> </body> </html>   Summary There is more in the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard than discussed in this blog post. My goal was to describe the basics. If you want to learn more than you can read through the entire standard at http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ In this blog post, I described some of the difficulties that you might encounter when attempting to replace HTML tables with Cascading Style Sheets when laying out a web page. I explained how you can take advantage of the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard to avoid these problems when building Metro style applications using JavaScript. CSS 3 Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for laying out a page without requiring you to use HTML table elements.

  Read the article

• Coding With Windows Azure IaaS

  - by Hisham El-bereky

  This post will focus on some advanced programming topics concerned with IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service) which provided as windows azure virtual machine (with its related resources like virtual disk and virtual network), you know that windows azure started as PaaS cloud platform but regarding to some business cases which need to have full control over their virtual machine, so windows azure directed toward providing IaaS. Sometimes you will need to manage your cloud IaaS through code may be for these reasons: Working on hyper-cloud system by providing bursting connector to windows azure virtual machines Providing multi-tenant system which consume windows azure virtual machine Automated process on your on-premises or cloud service which need to utilize some virtual resources We are going to implement the following basic operation using C# code: List images Create virtual machine List virtual machines Restart virtual machine Delete virtual machine Before going to implement the above operations we need to prepare client side and windows azure subscription to communicate correctly by providing management certificate (x.509 v3 certificates) which permit client access to resources in your Windows Azure subscription, whilst requests made using the Windows Azure Service Management REST API require authentication against a certificate that you provide to Windows Azure More info about setting management certificate located here. And to install .cer on other client machine you will need the .pfx file, or if not exist by exporting .cer as .pfx Note: You will need to install .net 4.5 on your machine to try the code So let start This post built on the post sent by Michael Washam "Advanced Windows Azure IaaS – Demo Code", so I'm here to declare some points and to add new operation which is not exist in Michael's demo The basic C# class object used here as client to azure REST API for IaaS service is HttpClient (Provides a base class for sending HTTP requests and receiving HTTP responses from a resource identified by a URI) this object must be initialized with the required data like certificate, headers and content if required. Also I'd like to refer here that the code is based on using Asynchronous programming with calls to azure which enhance the performance and gives us the ability to work with complex calls which depends on more than one sub-call to achieve some operation The following code explain how to get certificate and initializing HttpClient object with required data like headers and content HttpClient GetHttpClient() { X509Store certificateStore = null; X509Certificate2 certificate = null; try { certificateStore = new X509Store(StoreName.My, StoreLocation.CurrentUser); certificateStore.Open(OpenFlags.ReadOnly); string thumbprint = ConfigurationManager.AppSettings["CertThumbprint"]; var certificates = certificateStore.Certificates.Find(X509FindType.FindByThumbprint, thumbprint, false); if (certificates.Count > 0) { certificate = certificates[0]; } } finally { if (certificateStore != null) certificateStore.Close(); }   WebRequestHandler handler = new WebRequestHandler(); if (certificate!= null) { handler.ClientCertificates.Add(certificate); HttpClient httpClient = new HttpClient(handler); //And to set required headers lik x-ms-version httpClient.DefaultRequestHeaders.Add("x-ms-version", "2012-03-01"); httpClient.DefaultRequestHeaders.Accept.Add(new MediaTypeWithQualityHeaderValue("application/xml")); return httpClient; } return null; }  Let us keep the object httpClient as reference object used to call windows azure REST API IaaS service. For each request operation we need to define: Request URI HTTP Method Headers Content body (1) List images The List OS Images operation retrieves a list of the OS images from the image repository Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/images] Replace <subscription-id> with your windows Id HTTP Method GET (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Body None.  C# Code List<String> imageList = new List<String>(); //replace _subscriptionid with your WA subscription String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/images", _subscriptionid);  HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); Stream responseStream = await http.GetStreamAsync(uri);  if (responseStream != null) {      XDocument xml = XDocument.Load(responseStream);      var images = xml.Root.Descendants(ns + "OSImage").Where(i => i.Element(ns + "OS").Value == "Windows");      foreach (var image in images)      {      string img = image.Element(ns + "Name").Value;      imageList.Add(img);      } } More information about the REST call (Request/Response) located here on this link http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj157191.aspx (2) Create Virtual Machine Creating virtual machine required service and deployment to be created first, so creating VM should be done through three steps incase hosted service and deployment is not created yet Create hosted service, a container for service deployments in Windows Azure. A subscription may have zero or more hosted services Create deployment, a service that is running on Windows Azure. A deployment may be running in either the staging or production deployment environment. It may be managed either by referencing its deployment ID, or by referencing the deployment environment in which it's running. Create virtual machine, the previous two steps info required here in this step I suggest here to use the same name for service, deployment and service to make it easy to manage virtual machines Note: A name for the hosted service that is unique within Windows Azure. This name is the DNS prefix name and can be used to access the hosted service. For example: http://ServiceName.cloudapp.net// 2.1 Create service Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices HTTP Method POST (HTTP 1.1) Header x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Content-Type: application/xml Body More details about request body (and other information) are located here http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/gg441304.aspx C# code The following method show how to create hosted service async public Task<String> NewAzureCloudService(String ServiceName, String Location, String AffinityGroup, String subscriptionid) { String requestID = String.Empty;   String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices", subscriptionid); HttpClient http = GetHttpClient();   System.Text.ASCIIEncoding ae = new System.Text.ASCIIEncoding(); byte[] svcNameBytes = ae.GetBytes(ServiceName);   String locationEl = String.Empty; String locationVal = String.Empty;   if (String.IsNullOrEmpty(Location) == false) { locationEl = "Location"; locationVal = Location; } else { locationEl = "AffinityGroup"; locationVal = AffinityGroup; }   XElement srcTree = new XElement("CreateHostedService", new XAttribute(XNamespace.Xmlns + "i", ns1), new XElement("ServiceName", ServiceName), new XElement("Label", Convert.ToBase64String(svcNameBytes)), new XElement(locationEl, locationVal) ); ApplyNamespace(srcTree, ns);   XDocument CSXML = new XDocument(srcTree); HttpContent content = new StringContent(CSXML.ToString()); content.Headers.ContentType = new System.Net.Http.Headers.MediaTypeHeaderValue("application/xml");   HttpResponseMessage responseMsg = await http.PostAsync(uri, content); if (responseMsg != null) { requestID = responseMsg.Headers.GetValues("x-ms-request-id").FirstOrDefault(); } return requestID; } 2.2 Create Deployment Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices/<service-name>/deploymentslots/<deployment-slot-name> <deployment-slot-name> with staging or production, depending on where you wish to deploy your service package <service-name> provided as input from the previous step HTTP Method POST (HTTP 1.1) Header x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Content-Type: application/xml Body More details about request body (and other information) are located here http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/ee460813.aspx C# code The following method show how to create hosted service deployment async public Task<String> NewAzureVMDeployment(String ServiceName, String VMName, String VNETName, XDocument VMXML, XDocument DNSXML) { String requestID = String.Empty;     String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deployments", _subscriptionid, ServiceName); HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); XElement srcTree = new XElement("Deployment", new XAttribute(XNamespace.Xmlns + "i", ns1), new XElement("Name", ServiceName), new XElement("DeploymentSlot", "Production"), new XElement("Label", ServiceName), new XElement("RoleList", null) );   if (String.IsNullOrEmpty(VNETName) == false) { srcTree.Add(new XElement("VirtualNetworkName", VNETName)); }   if(DNSXML != null) { srcTree.Add(new XElement("DNS", new XElement("DNSServers", DNSXML))); }   XDocument deploymentXML = new XDocument(srcTree); ApplyNamespace(srcTree, ns);   deploymentXML.Descendants(ns + "RoleList").FirstOrDefault().Add(VMXML.Root);     String fixedXML = deploymentXML.ToString().Replace(" xmlns=\"\"", ""); HttpContent content = new StringContent(fixedXML); content.Headers.ContentType = new System.Net.Http.Headers.MediaTypeHeaderValue("application/xml");   HttpResponseMessage responseMsg = await http.PostAsync(uri, content); if (responseMsg != null) { requestID = responseMsg.Headers.GetValues("x-ms-request-id").FirstOrDefault(); }   return requestID; } 2.3 Create Virtual Machine Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices/<cloudservice-name>/deployments/<deployment-name>/roles <cloudservice-name> and <deployment-name> are provided as input from the previous steps Http Method POST (HTTP 1.1) Header x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Content-Type: application/xml Body More details about request body (and other information) located here http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj157186.aspx C# code async public Task<String> NewAzureVM(String ServiceName, String VMName, XDocument VMXML) { String requestID = String.Empty;   String deployment = await GetAzureDeploymentName(ServiceName);   String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deployments/{2}/roles", _subscriptionid, ServiceName, deployment);   HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); HttpContent content = new StringContent(VMXML.ToString()); content.Headers.ContentType = new System.Net.Http.Headers.MediaTypeHeaderValue("application/xml"); HttpResponseMessage responseMsg = await http.PostAsync(uri, content); if (responseMsg != null) { requestID = responseMsg.Headers.GetValues("x-ms-request-id").FirstOrDefault(); } return requestID; } (3) List Virtual Machines To list virtual machine hosted on windows azure subscription we have to loop over all hosted services to get its hosted virtual machines To do that we need to execute the following operations: listing hosted services listing hosted service Virtual machine 3.1 Listing Hosted Services Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices HTTP Method GET (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Body None. More info about this HTTP request located here on this link http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/ee460781.aspx C# Code async private Task<List<XDocument>> GetAzureServices(String subscriptionid) { String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices ", subscriptionid); List<XDocument> services = new List<XDocument>();   HttpClient http = GetHttpClient();   Stream responseStream = await http.GetStreamAsync(uri);   if (responseStream != null) { XDocument xml = XDocument.Load(responseStream); var svcs = xml.Root.Descendants(ns + "HostedService"); foreach (XElement r in svcs) { XDocument vm = new XDocument(r); services.Add(vm); } }   return services; }  3.2 Listing Hosted Service Virtual Machines Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices/<service-name>/deployments/<deployment-name>/roles/<role-name> HTTP Method GET (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Body None. More info about this HTTP request here http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj157193.aspx C# Code async public Task<XDocument> GetAzureVM(String ServiceName, String VMName, String subscriptionid) { String deployment = await GetAzureDeploymentName(ServiceName); XDocument vmXML = new XDocument();   String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deployments/{2}/roles/{3}", subscriptionid, ServiceName, deployment, VMName);   HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); Stream responseStream = await http.GetStreamAsync(uri); if (responseStream != null) { vmXML = XDocument.Load(responseStream); }   return vmXML; }  So the final method which can be used to list all virtual machines is: async public Task<XDocument> GetAzureVMs() { List<XDocument> services = await GetAzureServices(); XDocument vms = new XDocument(); vms.Add(new XElement("VirtualMachines")); ApplyNamespace(vms.Root, ns); foreach (var svc in services) { string ServiceName = svc.Root.Element(ns + "ServiceName").Value;   String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deploymentslots/{2}", _subscriptionid, ServiceName, "Production");   try { HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); Stream responseStream = await http.GetStreamAsync(uri);   if (responseStream != null) { XDocument xml = XDocument.Load(responseStream); var roles = xml.Root.Descendants(ns + "RoleInstance"); foreach (XElement r in roles) { XElement svcnameel = new XElement("ServiceName", ServiceName); ApplyNamespace(svcnameel, ns); r.Add(svcnameel); // not part of the roleinstance vms.Root.Add(r); } } } catch (HttpRequestException http) { // no vms with cloud service } } return vms; }  (4) Restart Virtual Machine Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices/<service-name>/deployments/<deployment-name>/roles/<role-name>/Operations HTTP Method POST (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Content-Type: application/xml Body <RestartRoleOperation xmlns:i="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"> <OperationType>RestartRoleOperation</OperationType> </RestartRoleOperation>  More details about this http request here http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj157197.aspx  C# Code async public Task<String> RebootVM(String ServiceName, String RoleName) { String requestID = String.Empty;   String deployment = await GetAzureDeploymentName(ServiceName); String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deployments/{2}/roleInstances/{3}/Operations", _subscriptionid, ServiceName, deployment, RoleName);   HttpClient http = GetHttpClient();   XElement srcTree = new XElement("RestartRoleOperation", new XAttribute(XNamespace.Xmlns + "i", ns1), new XElement("OperationType", "RestartRoleOperation") ); ApplyNamespace(srcTree, ns);   XDocument CSXML = new XDocument(srcTree); HttpContent content = new StringContent(CSXML.ToString()); content.Headers.ContentType = new System.Net.Http.Headers.MediaTypeHeaderValue("application/xml");   HttpResponseMessage responseMsg = await http.PostAsync(uri, content); if (responseMsg != null) { requestID = responseMsg.Headers.GetValues("x-ms-request-id").FirstOrDefault(); } return requestID; }  (5) Delete Virtual Machine You can delete your hosted virtual machine by deleting its deployment, but I prefer to delete its hosted service also, so you can easily manage your virtual machines from code 5.1 Delete Deployment Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/< subscription-id >/services/hostedservices/< service-name >/deployments/<Deployment-Name> HTTP Method DELETE (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Body None. C# code async public Task<HttpResponseMessage> DeleteDeployment( string deploymentName) { string xml = string.Empty; String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}/deployments/{2}", _subscriptionid, deploymentName, deploymentName); HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); HttpResponseMessage responseMessage = await http.DeleteAsync(uri); return responseMessage; }  5.2 Delete Hosted Service Request URI https://management.core.windows.net/<subscription-id>/services/hostedservices/<service-name> HTTP Method DELETE (HTTP 1.1) Headers x-ms-version: 2012-03-01 Body None. C# code async public Task<HttpResponseMessage> DeleteService(string serviceName) { string xml = string.Empty; String uri = String.Format("https://management.core.windows.net/{0}/services/hostedservices/{1}", _subscriptionid, serviceName); Log.Info("Windows Azure URI (http DELETE verb): " + uri, typeof(VMManager)); HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); HttpResponseMessage responseMessage = await http.DeleteAsync(uri); return responseMessage; }  And the following is the method which can used to delete both of deployment and service async public Task<string> DeleteVM(string vmName) { string responseString = string.Empty;   // as a convention here in this post, a unified name used for service, deployment and VM instance to make it easy to manage VMs HttpClient http = GetHttpClient(); HttpResponseMessage responseMessage = await DeleteDeployment(vmName);   if (responseMessage != null) {   string requestID = responseMessage.Headers.GetValues("x-ms-request-id").FirstOrDefault(); OperationResult result = await PollGetOperationStatus(requestID, 5, 120); if (result.Status == OperationStatus.Succeeded) { responseString = result.Message; HttpResponseMessage sResponseMessage = await DeleteService(vmName); if (sResponseMessage != null) { OperationResult sResult = await PollGetOperationStatus(requestID, 5, 120); responseString += sResult.Message; } } else { responseString = result.Message; } } return responseString; }  Note: This article is subject to be updated Hisham  References Advanced Windows Azure IaaS – Demo Code Windows Azure Service Management REST API Reference Introduction to the Azure Platform Representational state transfer Asynchronous Programming with Async and Await (C# and Visual Basic) HttpClient Class

  Read the article

• Configure Forms based authentication in SharePoint 2010

  - by sreejukg

    Configuring form authentication is a straight forward task in SharePoint. Mostly public facing websites built on SharePoint requires form based authentication. Recently, one of the WCM implementation where I was included in the project team required registration system. Any internet user can register to the site and the site offering them some membership specific functionalities once the user logged in. Since the registration open for all, I don’t want to store all those users in Active Directory. I have decided to use Forms based authentication for those users. This is a typical scenario of form authentication in SharePoint implementation. To implement form authentication you require the following A data store where you are storing the users – technically this can be active directory, SQL server database, LDAP etc. Form authentication will redirect the user to the login page, if the request is not authenticated. In the login page, there will be controls that validate the user inputs against the configured data store. In this article, I am going to use SQL server database with ASP.Net membership API’s to configure form based authentication in SharePoint 2010. This article assumes that you have SQL membership database available. I already configured the membership and roles database using aspnet_regsql command. If you want to know how to configure membership database using aspnet_regsql command, read the below blog post. http://weblogs.asp.net/sreejukg/archive/2011/06/16/usage-of-aspnet-regsql-exe-in-asp-net-4.aspx The snapshot of the database after implementing membership and role manager is as follows. I have used the database name “aspnetdb_claim”. Make sure you have created the database and make sure your database contains tables and stored procedures for membership. Create a web application with claims based authentication. This article assumes you already created a web application using claims based authentication. If you want to enable forms based authentication in SharePoint 2010, you must enable claims based authentication. Read this post for creating a web application using claims based authentication. http://weblogs.asp.net/sreejukg/archive/2011/06/15/create-a-web-application-in-sharepoint-2010-using-claims-based-authentication.aspx  You make sure, you have selected enable form authentication, and then selected Membership provider and Role manager name. To make sure you are done with the configuration, navigate to central administration website, from central administration, navigate to the Web Applications page, select the web application and click on icon, you will see the authentication providers for the current web application. Go to the section Claims authentication types, and make sure you have enabled forms based authentication. As mentioned in the snapshot, I have named the membership provider as SPFormAuthMembership and role manager as SPFormAuthRoleManager. You can choose your own names as you need. Modify the configuration files(Web.Config) to enable form authentication There are three applications that needs to be configured to support form authentication. The following are those applications. Central Administration If you want to assign permissions to web application using the credentials from form authentication, you need to update Central Administration configuration. If you do not want to access form authentication credentials from Central Administration, just leave this step.  STS service application Security Token service is the service application that issues security token when users are logging in. You need to modify the configuration of STS application to make sure users are able to login. To find the STS application, follow the following steps Go to the IIS Manager Expand the sites Node, you will see SharePoint Web Services Expand SharePoint Web Services, you can see SecurityTokenServiceApplication Right click SecuritytokenServiceApplication and click explore, it will open the corresponding file system. By default, the path for STS is C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server Extensions\14\WebServices\SecurityToken You need to modify the configuration file available in the mentioned location. The web application that needs to be enabled with form authentication. You need to modify the configuration of your web application to make sure your web application identifies users from the form authentication.   Based on the above, I am going to modify the web configuration. At end of each step, I have mentioned the expected output. I recommend you to go step by step and after each step, make sure the configuration changes are working as expected. If you do everything all together, and test your application at the end, you may face difficulties in troubleshooting the configuration errors. Modifications for Central Administration Web.Config Open the web.config for the Central administration in a text editor. I always prefer Visual Studio, for editing web.config. In most cases, the path of the web.config for the central administration website is as follows C:\inetpub\wwwroot\wss\VirtualDirectories\<port number> Make sure you keep a backup copy of the web.config, before editing it. Let me summarize what we are going to do with Central Administration web.config. First I am going to add a connection string that points to the form authentication database, that I created as mentioned in previous steps. Then I need to add a membership provider and a role manager with the corresponding connectionstring. Then I need to update the peoplepickerwildcards section to make sure the users are appearing in search results. By default there is no connection string available in the web.config of Central Administration. Add a connection string just after the configsections element. The below is the connection string I have used all over the article. <add name="FormAuthConnString" connectionString="Initial Catalog=yourdatabasename;data source=databaseservername;Integrated Security=SSPI;" /> Once you added the connection string, the web.config look similar to Now add membership provider to the code. In web.config for CA, there will be <membership> tag, search for it. You will find membership and role manager under the <system.web> element. Under the membership providers section add the below code… <add name="SPFormAuthMembership" type="System.Web.Security.SqlMembershipProvider, System.Web, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" applicationName="FormAuthApplication" connectionStringName="FormAuthConnString" /> After adding memberhip element, see the snapshot of the web.config. Now you need to add role manager element to the web.config. Insider providers element under rolemanager, add the below code. <add name="SPFormAuthRoleManager" type="System.Web.Security.SqlRoleProvider, System.Web, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" applicationName="FormAuthApplication" connectionStringName="FormAuthConnString" /> After adding, your role manager will look similar to the following. As a last step, you need to update the people picker wildcard element in web.config, so that the users from your membership provider are available for browsing in Central Administration. Search for PeoplePickerWildcards in the web.config, add the following inside the <PeoplePickerWildcards> tag. <add key="SPFormAuthMembership" value="%" /> After adding this element, your web.config will look like After completing these steps, you can browse the users available in the SQL server database from central administration website. Go to the site collection administrator’s page from central administration. Select the site collection you have created for form authentication. Click on the people picker icon, choose Forms Auth and click on the search icon, you will see the users listed from the SQL server database. Once you complete these steps, make sure the users are available for browsing from central administration website. If you are unable to find the users, there must be some errors in the configuration, check windows event logs to find related errors and fix them. Change the web.config for STS application Open the web.config for STS application in text editor. By default, STS web.config does not have system.Web or connectionstrings section. Just after the System.Webserver element, add the following code. <connectionStrings> <add name="FormAuthConnString" connectionString="Initial Catalog=aspnetdb_claim;data source=sp2010_db;Integrated Security=SSPI;" /> </connectionStrings> <system.web> <roleManager enabled="true" cacheRolesInCookie="false" cookieName=".ASPXROLES" cookieTimeout="30" cookiePath="/" cookieRequireSSL="false" cookieSlidingExpiration="true" cookieProtection="All" createPersistentCookie="false" maxCachedResults="25"> <providers> <add name="SPFormAuthRoleManager" type="System.Web.Security.SqlRoleProvider, System.Web, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" applicationName="FormAuthApplication" connectionStringName="FormAuthConnString" /> </providers> </roleManager> <membership userIsOnlineTimeWindow="15" hashAlgorithmType=""> <providers> <add name="SPFormAuthMembership" type="System.Web.Security.SqlMembershipProvider, System.Web, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" applicationName="FormAuthApplication" connectionStringName="FormAuthConnString" /> </providers> </membership> </system.web> See the snapshot of the web.config after adding the required elements. After adding this, you should be able to login using the credentials from SQL server. Try assigning a user as primary/secondary administrator for your site collection from Central Administration and login to your site using form authentication. If you made everything correct, you should be able to login. This means you have successfully completed configuration of STS Configuration of Web Application for Form Authentication As a last step, you need to modify the web.config of the form authentication web application. Once you have done this, you should be able to grant permissions to users stored in the membership database. Open the Web.config of the web application you created for form authentication. You can find the web.config for the application under the path C:\inetpub\wwwroot\wss\VirtualDirectories\<port number> Basically you need to add connection string, membership provider, role manager and update the people picker wild card configuration. Add the connection string (same as the one you added to the web.config in Central Administration). See the screenshot after the connection string has added. Search for <membership> in the web.config, you will find this inside system.web element. There will be other providers already available there. You add your form authentication membership provider (similar to the one added to Central Administration web.config) to the provider element under membership. Find the snapshot of membership configuration as follows. Search for <roleManager> element in web.config, add the new provider name under providers section of the roleManager element. See the snapshot of web.config after new provider added. Now you need to configure the peoplepickerwildcard configuration in web.config. As I specified earlier, this is to make sure, you can locate the users by entering a part of their username. Add the following line under the <PeoplePickerWildcards> element in web.config. See the screenshot of the peoplePickerWildcards element after the element has been added. Now you have completed all the setup for form authentication. Navigate to the web application. From the site actions -> site settings -> go to peope and groups Click on new -> add users, it will popup the people picker dialog. Click on the icon, select Form Auth, enter a username in the search textbox, and click on search icon. See the screenshot of admin search when I tried searching the users If it displays the user, it means you are done with the configuration. If you add users to the form authentication database, the users will be able to access SharePoint portal as normal.

  Read the article

• Solaris 11.1: Changes to included FOSS packages

  - by alanc

  Besides the documentation changes I mentioned last time, another place you can see Solaris 11.1 changes before upgrading is in the online package repository, now that the 11.1 packages have been published to http://pkg.oracle.com/solaris/release/, as the “0.175.1.0.0.24.2” branch. (Oracle Solaris Package Versioning explains what each field in that version string means.) When you’re ready to upgrade to the packages from either this repo, or the support repository, you’ll want to first read How to Update to Oracle Solaris 11.1 Using the Image Packaging System by Pete Dennis, as there are a couple issues you will need to be aware of to do that upgrade, several of which are due to changes in the Free and Open Source Software (FOSS) packages included with Solaris, as I’ll explain in a bit. Solaris 11 can update more readily than Solaris 10 In the Solaris 10 and older update models, the way the updates were built constrained what changes we could make in those releases. To change an existing SVR4 package in those releases, we created a Solaris Patch, which applied to a given version of the SVR4 package and replaced, added or deleted files in it. These patches were released via the support websites (originally SunSolve, now My Oracle Support) for applying to existing Solaris 10 installations, and were also merged into the install images for the next Solaris 10 update release. (This Solaris Patches blog post from Gerry Haskins dives deeper into that subject.) Some of the restrictions of this model were that package refactoring, changes to package dependencies, and even just changing the package version number, were difficult to do in this hybrid patch/OS update model. For instance, when Solaris 10 first shipped, it had the Xorg server from X11R6.8. Over the first couple years of update releases we were able to keep it up to date by replacing, adding, & removing files as necessary, taking it all the way up to Xorg server release 1.3 (new version numbering begun after the X11R7 split of the X11 tree into separate modules gave each module its own version). But if you run pkginfo on the SUNWxorg-server package, you’ll see it still displayed a version number of 6.8, confusing users as to which version was actually included. We stopped upgrading the Xorg server releases in Solaris 10 after 1.3, as later versions added new dependencies, such as HAL, D-Bus, and libpciaccess, which were very difficult to manage in this patching model. (We later got libpciaccess to work, but HAL & D-Bus would have been much harder due to the greater dependency tree underneath those.) Similarly, every time the GNOME team looked into upgrading Solaris 10 past GNOME 2.6, they found these constraints made it so difficult it wasn’t worthwhile, and eventually GNOME’s dependencies had changed enough it was completely infeasible. Fortunately, this worked out for both the X11 & GNOME teams, with our management making the business decision to concentrate on the “Nevada” branch for desktop users - first as Solaris Express Desktop Edition, and later as OpenSolaris, so we didn’t have to fight to try to make the package updates fit into these tight constraints. Meanwhile, the team designing the new packaging system for Solaris 11 was seeing us struggle with these problems, and making this much easier to manage for both the development teams and our users was one of their big goals for the IPS design they were working on. Now that we’ve reached the first update release to Solaris 11, we can start to see the fruits of their labors, with more FOSS updates in 11.1 than we had in many Solaris 10 update releases, keeping software more up to date with the upstream communities. Of course, just because we can more easily update now, doesn’t always mean we should or will do so, it just removes the package system limitations from forcing the decision for us. So while we’ve upgraded the X Window System in the 11.1 release from X11R7.6 to 7.7, the Solaris GNOME team decided it was not the right time to try to make the jump from GNOME 2 to GNOME 3, though they did update some individual components of the desktop, especially those with security fixes like Firefox. In other parts of the system, decisions as to what to update were prioritized based on how they affected other projects, or what customer requests we’d gotten for them. So with all that background in place, what packages did we actually update or add between Solaris 11.0 and 11.1? Core OS Functionality One of the FOSS changes with the biggest impact in this release is the upgrade from Grub Legacy (0.97) to Grub 2 (1.99) for the x64 platform boot loader. This is the cause of one of the upgrade quirks, since to go from Solaris 11.0 to 11.1 on x64 systems, you first need to update the Boot Environment tools (such as beadm) to a new version that can handle boot environments that use the Grub2 boot loader. System administrators can find the details they need to know about the new Grub in the Administering the GRand Unified Bootloader chapter of the Booting and Shutting Down Oracle Solaris 11.1 Systems guide. This change was necessary to be able to support new hardware coming into the x64 marketplace, including systems using UEFI firmware or booting off disk drives larger than 2 terabytes. For both platforms, Solaris 11.1 adds rsyslog as an optional alternative to the traditional syslogd, and OpenSCAP for checking security configuration settings are compliant with site policies. Note that the support repo actually has newer versions of BIND & fetchmail than the 11.1 release, as some late breaking critical fixes came through from the community upstream releases after the Solaris 11.1 release was frozen, and made their way to the support repository. These are responsible for the other big upgrade quirk in this release, in which to upgrade a system which already installed those versions from the support repo, you need to either wait for those packages to make their way to the 11.1 branch of the support repo, or follow the steps in the aforementioned upgrade walkthrough to let the package system know it's okay to temporarily downgrade those. Developer Stack While Solaris 11.0 included Python 2.7, many of the bundled python modules weren’t packaged for it yet, limiting its usability. For 11.1, many more of the python modules include 2.7 versions (enough that I filtered them out of the below table, but you can always search on the package repository server for them. For other language runtimes and development tools, 11.1 expands the use of IPS mediated links to choose which version of a package is the default when the packages are designed to allow multiple versions to install side by side. For instance, in Solaris 11.0, GNU automake 1.9 and 1.10 were provided, and developers had to run them as either automake-1.9 or automake-1.10. In Solaris 11.1, when automake 1.11 was added, also added was a /usr/bin/automake mediated link, which points to the automake-1.11 program by default, but can be changed to another version by running the pkg set-mediator command. Mediated links were also used for the Java runtime & development kits in 11.1, changing the default versions to the Java 7 releases (the 1.7.0.x package versions), while allowing admins to switch links such as /usr/bin/javac back to Java 6 if they need to for their site, to deal with Java 7 compatibility or other issues, without having to update each usage to use the full versioned /usr/jdk/jdk1.6.0_35/bin/javac paths for every invocation. Desktop Stack As I mentioned before, we upgraded from X11R7.6 to X11R7.7, since a pleasant coincidence made the X.Org release dates line up nicely with our feature & code freeze dates for this release. (Or perhaps it wasn’t so coincidental, after all, one of the benefits of being the person making the release is being able to decide what schedule is most convenient for you, and this one worked well for me.) For the table below, I’ve skipped listing the packages in which we use the X11 “katamari” version for the Solaris package version (mainly packages combining elements of multiple upstream modules with independent version numbers), since they just all changed from 7.6 to 7.7. In the graphics drivers, we worked with Intel to update the Intel Integrated Graphics Processor support to support 3D graphics and kernel mode setting on the Ivy Bridge chipsets, and updated Nvidia’s non-FOSS graphics driver from 280.13 to 295.20. Higher up in the desktop stack, PulseAudio was added for audio support, and liblouis for Braille support, and the GNOME applications were built to use them. The Mozilla applications, Firefox & Thunderbird moved to the current Extended Support Release (ESR) versions, 10.x for each, to bring up-to-date security fixes without having to be on Mozilla’s agressive 6 week feature cycle release train. Detailed list of changes This table shows most of the changes to the FOSS packages between Solaris 11.0 and 11.1. As noted above, some were excluded for clarity, or to reduce noise and duplication. All the FOSS packages which didn't change the version number in their packaging info are not included, even if they had updates to fix bugs, security holes, or add support for new hardware or new features of Solaris. Package11.011.1 archiver/unrar 3.8.5 4.1.4 audio/sox 14.3.0 14.3.2 backup/rdiff-backup 1.2.1 1.3.3 communication/im/pidgin 2.10.0 2.10.5 compress/gzip 1.3.5 1.4 compress/xz not included 5.0.1 database/sqlite-3 3.7.6.3 3.7.11 desktop/remote-desktop/tigervnc 1.0.90 1.1.0 desktop/window-manager/xcompmgr 1.1.5 1.1.6 desktop/xscreensaver 5.12 5.15 developer/build/autoconf 2.63 2.68 developer/build/autoconf/xorg-macros 1.15.0 1.17 developer/build/automake-111 not included 1.11.2 developer/build/cmake 2.6.2 2.8.6 developer/build/gnu-make 3.81 3.82 developer/build/imake 1.0.4 1.0.5 developer/build/libtool 1.5.22 2.4.2 developer/build/makedepend 1.0.3 1.0.4 developer/documentation-tool/doxygen 1.5.7.1 1.7.6.1 developer/gnu-binutils 2.19 2.21.1 developer/java/jdepend not included 2.9 developer/java/jdk-6 1.6.0.26 1.6.0.35 developer/java/jdk-7 1.7.0.0 1.7.0.7 developer/java/jpackage-utils not included 1.7.5 developer/java/junit 4.5 4.10 developer/lexer/jflex not included 1.4.1 developer/parser/byaccj not included 1.14 developer/parser/java_cup not included 0.10 developer/quilt 0.47 0.60 developer/versioning/git 1.7.3.2 1.7.9.2 developer/versioning/mercurial 1.8.4 2.2.1 developer/versioning/subversion 1.6.16 1.7.5 diagnostic/constype 1.0.3 1.0.4 diagnostic/nmap 5.21 5.51 diagnostic/scanpci 0.12.1 0.13.1 diagnostic/wireshark 1.4.8 1.8.2 diagnostic/xload 1.1.0 1.1.1 editor/gnu-emacs 23.1 23.4 editor/vim 7.3.254 7.3.600 file/lndir 1.0.2 1.0.3 image/editor/bitmap 1.0.5 1.0.6 image/gnuplot 4.4.0 4.6.0 image/library/libexif 0.6.19 0.6.21 image/library/libpng 1.4.8 1.4.11 image/library/librsvg 2.26.3 2.34.1 image/xcursorgen 1.0.4 1.0.5 library/audio/pulseaudio not included 1.1 library/cacao 2.3.0.0 2.3.1.0 library/expat 2.0.1 2.1.0 library/gc 7.1 7.2 library/graphics/pixman 0.22.0 0.24.4 library/guile 1.8.4 1.8.6 library/java/javadb 10.5.3.0 10.6.2.1 library/java/subversion 1.6.16 1.7.5 library/json-c not included 0.9 library/libedit not included 3.0 library/libee not included 0.3.2 library/libestr not included 0.1.2 library/libevent 1.3.5 1.4.14.2 library/liblouis not included 2.1.1 library/liblouisxml not included 2.1.0 library/libtecla 1.6.0 1.6.1 library/libtool/libltdl 1.5.22 2.4.2 library/nspr 4.8.8 4.8.9 library/openldap 2.4.25 2.4.30 library/pcre 7.8 8.21 library/perl-5/subversion 1.6.16 1.7.5 library/python-2/jsonrpclib not included 0.1.3 library/python-2/lxml 2.1.2 2.3.3 library/python-2/nose not included 1.1.2 library/python-2/pyopenssl not included 0.11 library/python-2/subversion 1.6.16 1.7.5 library/python-2/tkinter-26 2.6.4 2.6.8 library/python-2/tkinter-27 2.7.1 2.7.3 library/security/nss 4.12.10 4.13.1 library/security/openssl 1.0.0.5 (1.0.0e) 1.0.0.10 (1.0.0j) mail/thunderbird 6.0 10.0.6 network/dns/bind 9.6.3.4.3 9.6.3.7.2 package/pkgbuild not included 1.3.104 print/filter/enscript not included 1.6.4 print/filter/gutenprint 5.2.4 5.2.7 print/lp/filter/foomatic-rip 3.0.2 4.0.15 runtime/java/jre-6 1.6.0.26 1.6.0.35 runtime/java/jre-7 1.7.0.0 1.7.0.7 runtime/perl-512 5.12.3 5.12.4 runtime/python-26 2.6.4 2.6.8 runtime/python-27 2.7.1 2.7.3 runtime/ruby-18 1.8.7.334 1.8.7.357 runtime/tcl-8/tcl-sqlite-3 3.7.6.3 3.7.11 security/compliance/openscap not included 0.8.1 security/nss-utilities 4.12.10 4.13.1 security/sudo 1.8.1.2 1.8.4.5 service/network/dhcp/isc-dhcp 4.1 4.1.0.6 service/network/dns/bind 9.6.3.4.3 9.6.3.7.2 service/network/ftp (ProFTPD) 1.3.3.0.5 1.3.3.0.7 service/network/samba 3.5.10 3.6.6 shell/conflict 0.2004.9.1 0.2010.6.27 shell/pipe-viewer 1.1.4 1.2.0 shell/zsh 4.3.12 4.3.17 system/boot/grub 0.97 1.99 system/font/truetype/liberation 1.4 1.7.2 system/library/freetype-2 2.4.6 2.4.9 system/library/libnet 1.1.2.1 1.1.5 system/management/cim/pegasus 2.9.1 2.11.0 system/management/ipmitool 1.8.10 1.8.11 system/management/wbem/wbemcli 1.3.7 1.3.9.1 system/network/routing/quagga 0.99.8 0.99.19 system/rsyslog not included 6.2.0 terminal/luit 1.1.0 1.1.1 text/convmv 1.14 1.15 text/gawk 3.1.5 3.1.8 text/gnu-grep 2.5.4 2.10 web/browser/firefox 6.0.2 10.0.6 web/browser/links 1.0 1.0.3 web/java-servlet/tomcat 6.0.33 6.0.35 web/php-53 not included 5.3.14 web/php-53/extension/php-apc not included 3.1.9 web/php-53/extension/php-idn not included 0.2.0 web/php-53/extension/php-memcache not included 3.0.6 web/php-53/extension/php-mysql not included 5.3.14 web/php-53/extension/php-pear not included 5.3.14 web/php-53/extension/php-suhosin not included 0.9.33 web/php-53/extension/php-tcpwrap not included 1.1.3 web/php-53/extension/php-xdebug not included 2.2.0 web/php-common not included 11.1 web/proxy/squid 3.1.8 3.1.18 web/server/apache-22 2.2.20 2.2.22 web/server/apache-22/module/apache-sed 2.2.20 2.2.22 web/server/apache-22/module/apache-wsgi not included 3.3 x11/diagnostic/xev 1.1.0 1.2.0 x11/diagnostic/xscope 1.3 1.3.1 x11/documentation/xorg-docs 1.6 1.7 x11/keyboard/xkbcomp 1.2.3 1.2.4 x11/library/libdmx 1.1.1 1.1.2 x11/library/libdrm 2.4.25 2.4.32 x11/library/libfontenc 1.1.0 1.1.1 x11/library/libfs 1.0.3 1.0.4 x11/library/libice 1.0.7 1.0.8 x11/library/libsm 1.2.0 1.2.1 x11/library/libx11 1.4.4 1.5.0 x11/library/libxau 1.0.6 1.0.7 x11/library/libxcb 1.7 1.8.1 x11/library/libxcursor 1.1.12 1.1.13 x11/library/libxdmcp 1.1.0 1.1.1 x11/library/libxext 1.3.0 1.3.1 x11/library/libxfixes 4.0.5 5.0 x11/library/libxfont 1.4.4 1.4.5 x11/library/libxft 2.2.0 2.3.1 x11/library/libxi 1.4.3 1.6.1 x11/library/libxinerama 1.1.1 1.1.2 x11/library/libxkbfile 1.0.7 1.0.8 x11/library/libxmu 1.1.0 1.1.1 x11/library/libxmuu 1.1.0 1.1.1 x11/library/libxpm 3.5.9 3.5.10 x11/library/libxrender 0.9.6 0.9.7 x11/library/libxres 1.0.5 1.0.6 x11/library/libxscrnsaver 1.2.1 1.2.2 x11/library/libxtst 1.2.0 1.2.1 x11/library/libxv 1.0.6 1.0.7 x11/library/libxvmc 1.0.6 1.0.7 x11/library/libxxf86vm 1.1.1 1.1.2 x11/library/mesa 7.10.2 7.11.2 x11/library/toolkit/libxaw7 1.0.9 1.0.11 x11/library/toolkit/libxt 1.0.9 1.1.3 x11/library/xtrans 1.2.6 1.2.7 x11/oclock 1.0.2 1.0.3 x11/server/xdmx 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/server/xephyr 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/server/xorg 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-input-keyboard 1.6.0 1.6.1 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-input-mouse 1.7.1 1.7.2 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-input-synaptics 1.4.1 1.6.2 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-input-vmmouse 12.7.0 12.8.0 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-ast 0.91.10 0.93.10 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-ati 6.14.1 6.14.4 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-cirrus 1.3.2 1.4.0 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-dummy 0.3.4 0.3.5 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-intel 2.10.0 2.18.0 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-mach64 6.9.0 6.9.1 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-mga 1.4.13 1.5.0 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-openchrome 0.2.904 0.2.905 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-r128 6.8.1 6.8.2 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-trident 1.3.4 1.3.5 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-vesa 2.3.0 2.3.1 x11/server/xorg/driver/xorg-video-vmware 11.0.3 12.0.2 x11/server/xserver-common 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/server/xvfb 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/server/xvnc 1.0.90 1.1.0 x11/session/sessreg 1.0.6 1.0.7 x11/session/xauth 1.0.6 1.0.7 x11/session/xinit 1.3.1 1.3.2 x11/transset 0.9.1 1.0.0 x11/trusted/trusted-xorg 1.10.3 1.12.2 x11/x11-window-dump 1.0.4 1.0.5 x11/xclipboard 1.1.1 1.1.2 x11/xclock 1.0.5 1.0.6 x11/xfd 1.1.0 1.1.1 x11/xfontsel 1.0.3 1.0.4 x11/xfs 1.1.1 1.1.2 P.S. To get the version numbers for this table, I ran a quick perl script over the output from: % pkg contents -H -r -t depend -a type=incorporate -o fmri \ `pkg contents -H -r -t depend -a type=incorporate -o fmri [email protected],5.11-0.175.1.0.0.24` \ | sort /tmp/11.1 % pkg contents -H -r -t depend -a type=incorporate -o fmri \ `pkg contents -H -r -t depend -a type=incorporate -o fmri [email protected],5.11-0.175.0.0.0.2` \ | sort /tmp/11.0

  Read the article

• Introducing Data Annotations Extensions

  - by srkirkland

  Validation of user input is integral to building a modern web application, and ASP.NET MVC offers us a way to enforce business rules on both the client and server using Model Validation.  The recent release of ASP.NET MVC 3 has improved these offerings on the client side by introducing an unobtrusive validation library built on top of jquery.validation.  Out of the box MVC comes with support for Data Annotations (that is, System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations) and can be extended to support other frameworks.  Data Annotations Validation is becoming more popular and is being baked in to many other Microsoft offerings, including Entity Framework, though with MVC it only contains four validators: Range, Required, StringLength and Regular Expression.  The Data Annotations Extensions project attempts to augment these validators with additional attributes while maintaining the clean integration Data Annotations provides. A Quick Word About Data Annotations Extensions The Data Annotations Extensions project can be found at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/, and currently provides 11 additional validation attributes (ex: Email, EqualTo, Min/Max) on top of Data Annotations’ original 4.  You can find a current list of the validation attributes on the afore mentioned website. The core library provides server-side validation attributes that can be used in any .NET 4.0 project (no MVC dependency). There is also an easily pluggable client-side validation library which can be used in ASP.NET MVC 3 projects using unobtrusive jquery validation (only MVC3 included javascript files are required). On to the Preview Let’s say you had the following “Customer” domain model (or view model, depending on your project structure) in an MVC 3 project: public class Customer { public string Email { get; set; } public int Age { get; set; } public string ProfilePictureLocation { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } When it comes time to create/edit this Customer, you will probably have a CustomerController and a simple form that just uses one of the Html.EditorFor() methods that the ASP.NET MVC tooling generates for you (or you can write yourself).  It should look something like this: With no validation, the customer can enter nonsense for an email address, and then can even report their age as a negative number!  With the built-in Data Annotations validation, I could do a bit better by adding a Range to the age, adding a RegularExpression for email (yuck!), and adding some required attributes.  However, I’d still be able to report my age as 10.75 years old, and my profile picture could still be any string.  Let’s use Data Annotations along with this project, Data Annotations Extensions, and see what we can get: public class Customer { [Email] [Required] public string Email { get; set; }   [Integer] [Min(1, ErrorMessage="Unless you are benjamin button you are lying.")] [Required] public int Age { get; set; }   [FileExtensions("png|jpg|jpeg|gif")] public string ProfilePictureLocation { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Now let’s try to put in some invalid values and see what happens: That is very nice validation, all done on the client side (will also be validated on the server).  Also, the Customer class validation attributes are very easy to read and understand. Another bonus: Since Data Annotations Extensions can integrate with MVC 3’s unobtrusive validation, no additional scripts are required! Now that we’ve seen our target, let’s take a look at how to get there within a new MVC 3 project. Adding Data Annotations Extensions To Your Project First we will File->New Project and create an ASP.NET MVC 3 project.  I am going to use Razor for these examples, but any view engine can be used in practice.  Now go into the NuGet Extension Manager (right click on references and select add Library Package Reference) and search for “DataAnnotationsExtensions.”  You should see the following two packages: The first package is for server-side validation scenarios, but since we are using MVC 3 and would like comprehensive sever and client validation support, click on the DataAnnotationsExtensions.MVC3 project and then click Install.  This will install the Data Annotations Extensions server and client validation DLLs along with David Ebbo’s web activator (which enables the validation attributes to be registered with MVC 3). Now that Data Annotations Extensions is installed you have all you need to start doing advanced model validation.  If you are already using Data Annotations in your project, just making use of the additional validation attributes will provide client and server validation automatically.  However, assuming you are starting with a blank project I’ll walk you through setting up a controller and model to test with. Creating Your Model In the Models folder, create a new User.cs file with a User class that you can use as a model.  To start with, I’ll use the following class: public class User { public string Email { get; set; } public string Password { get; set; } public string PasswordConfirm { get; set; } public string HomePage { get; set; } public int Age { get; set; } } Next, create a simple controller with at least a Create method, and then a matching Create view (note, you can do all of this via the MVC built-in tooling).  Your files will look something like this: UserController.cs: public class UserController : Controller { public ActionResult Create() { return View(new User()); }   [HttpPost] public ActionResult Create(User user) { if (!ModelState.IsValid) { return View(user); }   return Content("User valid!"); } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Create.cshtml: @model NuGetValidationTester.Models.User   @{ ViewBag.Title = "Create"; }   <h2>Create</h2>   <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/jquery.validate.min.js")" type="text/javascript"></script> <script src="@Url.Content("~/Scripts/jquery.validate.unobtrusive.min.js")" type="text/javascript"></script>   @using (Html.BeginForm()) { @Html.ValidationSummary(true) <fieldset> <legend>User</legend> @Html.EditorForModel() <p> <input type="submit" value="Create" /> </p> </fieldset> } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } In the Create.cshtml view, note that we are referencing jquery validation and jquery unobtrusive (jquery is referenced in the layout page).  These MVC 3 included scripts are the only ones you need to enjoy both the basic Data Annotations validation as well as the validation additions available in Data Annotations Extensions.  These references are added by default when you use the MVC 3 “Add View” dialog on a modification template type. Now when we go to /User/Create we should see a form for editing a User Since we haven’t yet added any validation attributes, this form is valid as shown (including no password, email and an age of 0).  With the built-in Data Annotations attributes we can make some of the fields required, and we could use a range validator of maybe 1 to 110 on Age (of course we don’t want to leave out supercentenarians) but let’s go further and validate our input comprehensively using Data Annotations Extensions.  The new and improved User.cs model class. { [Required] [Email] public string Email { get; set; }   [Required] public string Password { get; set; }   [Required] [EqualTo("Password")] public string PasswordConfirm { get; set; }   [Url] public string HomePage { get; set; }   [Integer] [Min(1)] public int Age { get; set; } } .csharpcode, .csharpcode pre { font-size: small; color: black; font-family: consolas, "Courier New", courier, monospace; background-color: #ffffff; /*white-space: pre;*/ } .csharpcode pre { margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .rem { color: #008000; } .csharpcode .kwrd { color: #0000ff; } .csharpcode .str { color: #006080; } .csharpcode .op { color: #0000c0; } .csharpcode .preproc { color: #cc6633; } .csharpcode .asp { background-color: #ffff00; } .csharpcode .html { color: #800000; } .csharpcode .attr { color: #ff0000; } .csharpcode .alt { background-color: #f4f4f4; width: 100%; margin: 0em; } .csharpcode .lnum { color: #606060; } Now let’s re-run our form and try to use some invalid values: All of the validation errors you see above occurred on the client, without ever even hitting submit.  The validation is also checked on the server, which is a good practice since client validation is easily bypassed. That’s all you need to do to start a new project and include Data Annotations Extensions, and of course you can integrate it into an existing project just as easily. Nitpickers Corner ASP.NET MVC 3 futures defines four new data annotations attributes which this project has as well: CreditCard, Email, Url and EqualTo.  Unfortunately referencing MVC 3 futures necessitates taking an dependency on MVC 3 in your model layer, which may be unadvisable in a multi-tiered project.  Data Annotations Extensions keeps the server and client side libraries separate so using the project’s validation attributes don’t require you to take any additional dependencies in your model layer which still allowing for the rich client validation experience if you are using MVC 3. Custom Error Message and Globalization: Since the Data Annotations Extensions are build on top of Data Annotations, you have the ability to define your own static error messages and even to use resource files for very customizable error messages. Available Validators: Please see the project site at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/ for an up-to-date list of the new validators included in this project.  As of this post, the following validators are available: CreditCard Date Digits Email EqualTo FileExtensions Integer Max Min Numeric Url Conclusion Hopefully I’ve illustrated how easy it is to add server and client validation to your MVC 3 projects, and how to easily you can extend the available validation options to meet real world needs. The Data Annotations Extensions project is fully open source under the BSD license.  Any feedback would be greatly appreciated.  More information than you require, along with links to the source code, is available at http://dataannotationsextensions.org/. Enjoy!

  Read the article

• lxc containers hangs after upgrade to 13.10

  - by doug123

  I have 3 lxc containers. They were all working fine on 12.10 and I upgraded the containers with do-release-upgrade on the containers to 13.04 and 13.10 and that worked great. Then I upgraded the host to 13.04 and then 13.10 and now the 3 containers hang with this: >lxc-start -n as1 -l DEBUG -o $(tty) lxc-start 1383145786.513 INFO lxc_start_ui - using rcfile /var/lib/lxc/as1/config lxc-start 1383145786.513 WARN lxc_log - lxc_log_init called with log already initialized lxc-start 1383145786.513 INFO lxc_apparmor - aa_enabled set to 1 lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/2' (5/6) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/13' (7/8) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/14' (9/10) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/15' (11/12) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/17' (13/14) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/18' (15/16) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/19' (17/18) lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_conf - allocated pty '/dev/pts/20' (19/20) lxc-start 1383145786.514 INFO lxc_conf - tty's configured lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_start - sigchild handler set lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_console - opening /dev/tty for console peer lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_console - using '/dev/tty' as console lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_console - 6242 got SIGWINCH fd 25 lxc-start 1383145786.514 DEBUG lxc_console - set winsz dstfd:22 cols:177 rows:53 lxc-start 1383145786.514 INFO lxc_start - 'as1' is initialized lxc-start 1383145786.522 DEBUG lxc_start - Not dropping cap_sys_boot or watching utmp lxc-start 1383145786.524 DEBUG lxc_conf - mac address of host interface 'vethB4L35W' changed to private fe:7c:96:a0:ae:29 lxc-start 1383145786.525 DEBUG lxc_conf - instanciated veth 'vethB4L35W/vethVC61K2', index is '26' lxc-start 1383145786.529 DEBUG lxc_cgroup - cgroup 'memory.limit_in_bytes' set to '20G' lxc-start 1383145786.529 DEBUG lxc_cgroup - cgroup 'cpuset.cpus' set to '12-23' lxc-start 1383145786.529 INFO lxc_cgroup - cgroup has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.555 DEBUG lxc_conf - move 'eth0' to '6249' lxc-start 1383145786.555 INFO lxc_conf - 'as1' hostname has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.575 DEBUG lxc_conf - 'eth0' has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - network has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .44 42 252:0 / / rw,relatime - ext4 /dev/mapper/limitorderbook1-root rw,errors=remount-ro,data=ordered . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .52 44 0:5 / /dev rw,relatime - devtmpfs udev rw,size=32961632k,nr_inodes=8240408,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /dev. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .61 52 0:11 / /dev/pts rw,nosuid,noexec,relatime - devpts devpts rw,mode=600,ptmxmode=000 . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /dev/pts. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .68 44 0:15 / /run rw,nosuid,noexec,relatime - tmpfs tmpfs rw,size=6594456k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .69 68 0:18 / /run/lock rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=5120k . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/lock. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .72 68 0:19 / /run/shm rw,nosuid,nodev,relatime - tmpfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/shm. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .73 68 0:21 / /run/user rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=102400k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/user. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .76 44 0:14 / /sys rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - sysfs sysfs rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .77 76 0:16 / /sys/fs/cgroup rw,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=4k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .78 77 0:20 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpuset,clone_children . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .79 77 0:23 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpu . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .80 77 0:24 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuacct rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpuacct . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuacct. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .81 77 0:25 / /sys/fs/cgroup/memory rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,memory . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/memory. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .82 77 0:26 / /sys/fs/cgroup/devices rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,devices . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/devices. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .83 77 0:27 / /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,freezer . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .84 77 0:28 / /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,blkio . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .85 77 0:29 / /sys/fs/cgroup/perf_event rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,perf_event . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/perf_event. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .94 77 0:30 / /sys/fs/cgroup/hugetlb rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,hugetlb . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/hugetlb. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .95 77 0:31 / /sys/fs/cgroup/systemd rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - cgroup systemd rw,name=systemd . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/systemd. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .96 76 0:17 / /sys/fs/fuse/connections rw,relatime - fusectl none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/fuse/connections. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .98 76 0:6 / /sys/kernel/debug rw,relatime - debugfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/kernel/debug. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .101 76 0:10 / /sys/kernel/security rw,relatime - securityfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/kernel/security. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .102 76 0:22 / /sys/fs/pstore rw,relatime - pstore none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/pstore. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .103 44 0:3 / /proc rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - proc proc rw . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /proc. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .104 44 9:2 / /data rw,relatime - ext4 /dev/md2 rw,errors=remount-ro,data=ordered . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /data. lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .105 44 8:1 / /boot rw,relatime - ext2 /dev/sda1 rw,errors=continue . lxc-start 1383145786.575 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /boot. lxc-start 1383145786.576 DEBUG lxc_conf - mounted '/data/srv/lxc/as1' on '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc' lxc-start 1383145786.576 DEBUG lxc_conf - mounted 'none' on '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc//dev/pts', type 'devpts' lxc-start 1383145786.576 DEBUG lxc_conf - mounted 'none' on '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc//proc', type 'proc' lxc-start 1383145786.576 DEBUG lxc_conf - mounted 'none' on '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc//sys', type 'sysfs' lxc-start 1383145786.576 DEBUG lxc_conf - mounted 'none' on '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc//run', type 'tmpfs' lxc-start 1383145786.576 INFO lxc_conf - mount points have been setup lxc-start 1383145786.577 INFO lxc_conf - console has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.577 INFO lxc_conf - 8 tty(s) has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.577 INFO lxc_conf - rootfs path is ./data/srv/lxc/as1., mount is ./usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc. lxc-start 1383145786.577 INFO lxc_apparmor - I am 1, /proc/self points to 1 lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - created '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc/lxc_putold' directory lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - mountpoint for old rootfs is '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc/lxc_putold' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - pivot_root syscall to '/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/lxc' successful lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/dev/pts' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/run/lock' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/run/shm' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/run/user' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/cpu' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/cpuacct' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/memory' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/devices' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/freezer' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/blkio' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/perf_event' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/hugetlb' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup/systemd' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/fuse/connections' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/kernel/debug' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/kernel/security' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/pstore' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/proc' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/data' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/boot' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/dev' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/run' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys/fs/cgroup' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold/sys' lxc-start 1383145786.577 DEBUG lxc_conf - umounted '/lxc_putold' lxc-start 1383145786.577 INFO lxc_conf - created new pts instance lxc-start 1383145786.578 DEBUG lxc_conf - drop capability 'sys_boot' (22) lxc-start 1383145786.578 DEBUG lxc_conf - capabilities have been setup lxc-start 1383145786.578 NOTICE lxc_conf - 'as1' is setup. lxc-start 1383145786.578 DEBUG lxc_cgroup - cgroup 'memory.limit_in_bytes' set to '20G' lxc-start 1383145786.578 DEBUG lxc_cgroup - cgroup 'cpuset.cpus' set to '12-23' lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_cgroup - cgroup has been setup lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_apparmor - setting up apparmor lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_apparmor - changed apparmor profile to lxc-container-default lxc-start 1383145786.578 NOTICE lxc_start - exec'ing '/sbin/init' lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .15 20 0:14 / /sys rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - sysfs sysfs rw . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .16 20 0:3 / /proc rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - proc proc rw . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /proc. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .17 20 0:5 / /dev rw,relatime - devtmpfs udev rw,size=32961632k,nr_inodes=8240408,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /dev. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .18 17 0:11 / /dev/pts rw,nosuid,noexec,relatime - devpts devpts rw,mode=600,ptmxmode=000 . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /dev/pts. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .19 20 0:15 / /run rw,nosuid,noexec,relatime - tmpfs tmpfs rw,size=6594456k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .20 1 252:0 / / rw,relatime - ext4 /dev/mapper/limitorderbook1-root rw,errors=remount-ro,data=ordered . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .22 15 0:16 / /sys/fs/cgroup rw,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=4k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .23 15 0:17 / /sys/fs/fuse/connections rw,relatime - fusectl none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/fuse/connections. lxc-start 1383145786.578 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .24 15 0:6 / /sys/kernel/debug rw,relatime - debugfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/kernel/debug. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .25 15 0:10 / /sys/kernel/security rw,relatime - securityfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/kernel/security. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .26 19 0:18 / /run/lock rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=5120k . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/lock. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .27 19 0:19 / /run/shm rw,nosuid,nodev,relatime - tmpfs none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/shm. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .28 22 0:20 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpuset,clone_children . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .29 19 0:21 / /run/user rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - tmpfs none rw,size=102400k,mode=755 . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /run/user. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .30 15 0:22 / /sys/fs/pstore rw,relatime - pstore none rw . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/pstore. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .31 22 0:23 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpu . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .32 22 0:24 / /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuacct rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,cpuacct . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuacct. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .33 22 0:25 / /sys/fs/cgroup/memory rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,memory . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/memory. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .34 22 0:26 / /sys/fs/cgroup/devices rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,devices . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/devices. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .35 22 0:27 / /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,freezer . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .36 22 0:28 / /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,blkio . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .37 22 0:29 / /sys/fs/cgroup/perf_event rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,perf_event . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/perf_event. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .38 22 0:30 / /sys/fs/cgroup/hugetlb rw,relatime - cgroup cgroup rw,hugetlb . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/hugetlb. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .39 20 9:2 / /data rw,relatime - ext4 /dev/md2 rw,errors=remount-ro,data=ordered . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /data. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .40 20 8:1 / /boot rw,relatime - ext2 /dev/sda1 rw,errors=continue . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /boot. lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - looking at .41 22 0:31 / /sys/fs/cgroup/systemd rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime - cgroup systemd rw,name=systemd . lxc-start 1383145786.579 INFO lxc_conf - now p is . /sys/fs/cgroup/systemd. lxc-start 1383145786.579 NOTICE lxc_start - '/sbin/init' started with pid '6249' lxc-start 1383145786.579 WARN lxc_start - invalid pid for SIGCHLD <4>init: ureadahead main process (7) terminated with status 5 <4>init: console-font main process (94) terminated with status 1 And it will just sit there like that for hours at least. The container becomes pingable but I can't ssh and if I try lxc-console -n as1 I get a blank screen. If I do lxc-stop -n as1 or ^C in the window where it has hung I get: ^CTERM environment variable not set. <4>init: plymouth-upstart-bridge main process (192) terminated with status 1 <4>init: hwclock-save main process (187) terminated with status 70 * Asking all remaining processes to terminate... ...done. * All processes ended within 1 seconds... ...done. * Deactivating swap... ...fail! mount: cannot mount block device /dev/md2 read-only * Will now restart But after 20 minutes it hasn't restarted. Any ideas why these containers are hanging?

  Read the article

• Auto blocking attacking IP address

  - by dong

  This is to share my PowerShell code online. I original asked this question on MSDN forum (or TechNet?) here: http://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/en-US/winserversecurity/thread/f950686e-e3f8-4cf2-b8ec-2685c1ed7a77 In short, this is trying to find attacking IP address then add it into Firewall block rule. So I suppose: 1, You are running a Windows Server 2008 facing the Internet. 2, You need to have some port open for service, e.g. TCP 21 for FTP; TCP 3389 for Remote Desktop. You can see in my code I’m only dealing with these two since that’s what I opened. You can add further port number if you like, but the way to process might be different with these two. 3, I strongly suggest you use STRONG password and follow all security best practices, this ps1 code is NOT for adding security to your server, but reduce the nuisance from brute force attack, and make sys admin’s life easier: i.e. your FTP log won’t hold megabytes of nonsense, your Windows system log will not roll back and only can tell you what happened last month. 4, You are comfortable with setting up Windows Firewall rules, in my code, my rule has a name of “MY BLACKLIST”, you need to setup a similar one, and set it to BLOCK everything. 5, My rule is dangerous because it has the risk to block myself out as well. I do have a backup plan i.e. the DELL DRAC5 so that if that happens, I still can remote console to my server and reset the firewall. 6, By no means the code is perfect, the coding style, the use of PowerShell skills, the hard coded part, all can be improved, it’s just that it’s good enough for me already. It has been running on my server for more than 7 MONTHS. 7, Current code still has problem, I didn’t solve it yet, further on this point after the code. :)    #Dong Xie, March 2012  #my simple code to monitor attack and deal with it  #Windows Server 2008 Logon Type  #8: NetworkCleartext, i.e. FTP  #10: RemoteInteractive, i.e. RDP    $tick = 0;  "Start to run at: " + (get-date);    $regex1 = [regex] "192\.168\.100\.(?:101|102):3389\s+(\d+\.\d+\.\d+\.\d+)";  $regex2 = [regex] "Source Network Address:\t(\d+\.\d+\.\d+\.\d+)";    while($True) {   $blacklist = @();     "Running... (tick:" + $tick + ")"; $tick+=1;    #Port 3389  $a = @()  netstat -no | Select-String ":3389" | ? { $m = $regex1.Match($_); `    $ip = $m.Groups[1].Value; if ($m.Success -and $ip -ne "10.0.0.1") {$a = $a + $ip;} }  if ($a.count -gt 0) {    $ips = get-eventlog Security -Newest 1000 | Where-Object {$_.EventID -eq 4625 -and $_.Message -match "Logon Type:\s+10"} | foreach { `      $m = $regex2.Match($_.Message); $ip = $m.Groups[1].Value; $ip; } | Sort-Object | Tee-Object -Variable list | Get-Unique    foreach ($ip in $a) { if ($ips -contains $ip) {      if (-not ($blacklist -contains $ip)) {        $attack_count = ($list | Select-String $ip -SimpleMatch | Measure-Object).count;        "Found attacking IP on 3389: " + $ip + ", with count: " + $attack_count;        if ($attack_count -ge 20) {$blacklist = $blacklist + $ip;}      }      }    }  }      #FTP  $now = (Get-Date).AddMinutes(-5); #check only last 5 mins.     #Get-EventLog has built-in switch for EventID, Message, Time, etc. but using any of these it will be VERY slow.  $count = (Get-EventLog Security -Newest 1000 | Where-Object {$_.EventID -eq 4625 -and $_.Message -match "Logon Type:\s+8" -and `              $_.TimeGenerated.CompareTo($now) -gt 0} | Measure-Object).count;  if ($count -gt 50) #threshold  {     $ips = @();     $ips1 = dir "C:\inetpub\logs\LogFiles\FPTSVC2" | Sort-Object -Property LastWriteTime -Descending `       | select -First 1 | gc | select -Last 200 | where {$_ -match "An\+error\+occured\+during\+the\+authentication\+process."} `        | Select-String -Pattern "(\d+\.\d+\.\d+\.\d+)" | select -ExpandProperty Matches | select -ExpandProperty value | Group-Object `        | where {$_.Count -ge 10} | select -ExpandProperty Name;       $ips2 = dir "C:\inetpub\logs\LogFiles\FTPSVC3" | Sort-Object -Property LastWriteTime -Descending `       | select -First 1 | gc | select -Last 200 | where {$_ -match "An\+error\+occured\+during\+the\+authentication\+process."} `        | Select-String -Pattern "(\d+\.\d+\.\d+\.\d+)" | select -ExpandProperty Matches | select -ExpandProperty value | Group-Object `        | where {$_.Count -ge 10} | select -ExpandProperty Name;     $ips += $ips1; $ips += $ips2; $ips = $ips | where {$_ -ne "10.0.0.1"} | Sort-Object | Get-Unique;         foreach ($ip in $ips) {       if (-not ($blacklist -contains $ip)) {        "Found attacking IP on FTP: " + $ip;        $blacklist = $blacklist + $ip;       }     }  }        #Firewall change <# $current = (netsh advfirewall firewall show rule name="MY BLACKLIST" | where {$_ -match "RemoteIP"}).replace("RemoteIP:", "").replace(" ","").replace("/255.255.255.255",""); #inside $current there is no \r or \n need remove. foreach ($ip in $blacklist) { if (-not ($current -match $ip) -and -not ($ip -like "10.0.0.*")) {"Adding this IP into firewall blocklist: " + $ip; $c= 'netsh advfirewall firewall set rule name="MY BLACKLIST" new RemoteIP="{0},{1}"' -f $ip, $current; Invoke-Expression $c; } } #>    foreach ($ip in $blacklist) {    $fw=New-object –comObject HNetCfg.FwPolicy2; # http://blogs.technet.com/b/jamesone/archive/2009/02/18/how-to-manage-the-windows-firewall-settings-with-powershell.aspx    $myrule = $fw.Rules | where {$_.Name -eq "MY BLACKLIST"} | select -First 1; # Potential bug here?    if (-not ($myrule.RemoteAddresses -match $ip) -and -not ($ip -like "10.0.0.*"))      {"Adding this IP into firewall blocklist: " + $ip;         $myrule.RemoteAddresses+=(","+$ip);      }  }    Wait-Event -Timeout 30 #pause 30 secs    } # end of top while loop.   Further points: 1, I suppose the server is listening on port 3389 on server IP: 192.168.100.101 and 192.168.100.102, you need to replace that with your real IP. 2, I suppose you are Remote Desktop to this server from a workstation with IP: 10.0.0.1. Please replace as well. 3, The threshold for 3389 attack is 20, you don’t want to block yourself just because you typed your password wrong 3 times, you can change this threshold by your own reasoning. 4, FTP is checking the log for attack only to the last 5 mins, you can change that as well. 5, I suppose the server is serving FTP on both IP address and their LOG path are C:\inetpub\logs\LogFiles\FPTSVC2 and C:\inetpub\logs\LogFiles\FPTSVC3. Change accordingly. 6, FTP checking code is only asking for the last 200 lines of log, and the threshold is 10, change as you wish. 7, the code runs in a loop, you can set the loop time at the last line. To run this code, copy and paste to your editor, finish all the editing, get it to your server, and open an CMD window, then type powershell.exe –file your_powershell_file_name.ps1, it will start running, you can Ctrl-C to break it. This is what you see when it’s running: This is when it detected attack and adding the firewall rule: Regarding the design of the code: 1, There are many ways you can detect the attack, but to add an IP into a block rule is no small thing, you need to think hard before doing it, reason for that may include: You don’t want block yourself; and not blocking your customer/user, i.e. the good guy. 2, Thus for each service/port, I double check. For 3389, first it needs to show in netstat.exe, then the Event log; for FTP, first check the Event log, then the FTP log files. 3, At three places I need to make sure I’m not adding myself into the block rule. –ne with single IP, –like with subnet.   Now the final bit: 1, The code will stop working after a while (depends on how busy you are attacked, could be weeks, months, or days?!) It will throw Red error message in CMD, don’t Panic, it does no harm, but it also no longer blocking new attack. THE REASON is not confirmed with MS people: the COM object to manage firewall, you can only give it a list of IP addresses to the length of around 32KB I think, once it reaches the limit, you get the error message. 2, This is in fact my second solution to use the COM object, the first solution is still in the comment block for your reference, which is using netsh, that fails because being run from CMD, you can only throw it a list of IP to 8KB. 3, I haven’t worked the workaround yet, some ideas include: wrap that RemoteAddresses setting line with error checking and once it reaches the limit, use the newly detected IP to be the list, not appending to it. This basically reset your block rule to ground zero and lose the previous bad IPs. This does no harm as it sounds, because given a certain period has passed, any these bad IPs still not repent and continue the attack to you, it only got 30 seconds or 20 guesses of your password before you block it again. And there is the benefit that the bad IP may turn back to the good hands again, and you are not blocking a potential customer or your CEO’s home pc because once upon a time, it’s a zombie. Thus the ZEN of blocking: never block any IP for too long. 4, But if you insist to block the ugly forever, my other ideas include: You call MS support, ask them how can we set an arbitrary length of IP addresses in a rule; at least from my experiences at the Forum, they don’t know and they don’t care, because they think the dynamic blocking should be done by some expensive hardware. Or, from programming perspective, you can create a new rule once the old is full, then you’ll have MY BLACKLIST1, MY  BLACKLIST2, MY BLACKLIST3, … etc. Once in a while you can compile them together and start a business to sell your blacklist on the market! Enjoy the code! p.s. (PowerShell is REALLY REALLY GREAT!)

  Read the article

• Metro: Introduction to CSS 3 Grid Layout

  - by Stephen.Walther

  The purpose of this blog post is to provide you with a quick introduction to the new W3C CSS 3 Grid Layout standard. You can use CSS Grid Layout in Metro style applications written with JavaScript to lay out the content of an HTML page. CSS Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without requiring you to actually use any HTML table elements. Doing Page Layouts without Tables Back in the 1990’s, if you wanted to create a fancy website, then you would use HTML tables for layout. For example, if you wanted to create a standard three-column page layout then you would create an HTML table with three columns like this: <table height="100%"> <tr> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="red"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </td> <td valign="top" bgcolor="green"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </td> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="blue"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </td> </tr> </table> When the table above gets rendered out to a browser, you end up with the following three-column layout: The width of the left and right columns is fixed – the width of the middle column expands or contracts depending on the width of the browser. Sometime around the year 2005, everyone decided that using tables for layout was a bad idea. Instead of using tables for layout — it was collectively decided by the spirit of the Web — you should use Cascading Style Sheets instead. Why is using HTML tables for layout bad? Using tables for layout breaks the semantics of the TABLE element. A TABLE element should be used only for displaying tabular information such as train schedules or moon phases. Using tables for layout is bad for accessibility (The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 1.0 is explicit about this) and using tables for layout is bad for separating content from layout (see http://CSSZenGarden.com). Post 2005, anyone who used HTML tables for layout were encouraged to hold their heads down in shame. That’s all well and good, but the problem with using CSS for layout is that it can be more difficult to work with CSS than HTML tables. For example, to achieve a standard three-column layout, you either need to use absolute positioning or floats. Here’s a three-column layout with floats: <style type="text/css"> #container { min-width: 800px; } #leftColumn { float: left; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { background-color:green; height: 100%; } #rightColumn { float: right; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:blue; } </style> <div id="container"> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> </div> The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIV. The leftColumn DIV element is floated to the left and the rightColumn DIV element is floated to the right. Notice that the rightColumn DIV appears in the page before the middleColumn DIV – this unintuitive ordering is necessary to get the floats to work correctly (see http://stackoverflow.com/questions/533607/css-three-column-layout-problem). The page above (almost) works with the most recent versions of most browsers. For example, you get the correct three-column layout in both Firefox and Chrome: And the layout mostly works with Internet Explorer 9 except for the fact that for some strange reason the min-width doesn’t work so when you shrink the width of your browser, you can get the following unwanted layout: Notice how the middle column (the green column) bleeds to the left and right. People have solved these issues with more complicated CSS. For example, see: http://matthewjamestaylor.com/blog/holy-grail-no-quirks-mode.htm But, at this point, no one could argue that using CSS is easier or more intuitive than tables. It takes work to get a layout with CSS and we know that we could achieve the same layout more easily using HTML tables. Using CSS Grid Layout CSS Grid Layout is a new W3C standard which provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without the disadvantage of using an HTML TABLE element. In other words, CSS Grid Layout enables you to perform table layouts using pure Cascading Style Sheets. The CSS Grid Layout standard is still in a “Working Draft” state (it is not finalized) and it is located here: http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ The CSS Grid Layout standard is only supported by Internet Explorer 10 and there are no signs that any browser other than Internet Explorer will support this standard in the near future. This means that it is only practical to take advantage of CSS Grid Layout when building Metro style applications with JavaScript. Here’s how you can create a standard three-column layout using a CSS Grid Layout: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> </div> </body> </html> When the page above is rendered in Internet Explorer 10, you get a standard three-column layout: The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn DIV, middleColumn DIV, and rightColumn DIV. The container DIV is set to Grid display mode with the following CSS rule: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } The display property is set to the value “-ms-grid”. This property causes the container DIV to lay out its child elements in a grid. (Notice that you use “-ms-grid” instead of “grid”. The “-ms-“ prefix is used because the CSS Grid Layout standard is still preliminary. This implementation only works with IE10 and it might change before the final release.) The grid columns and rows are defined with the “-ms-grid-columns” and “-ms-grid-rows” properties. The style rule above creates a grid with three columns and one row. The left and right columns are fixed sized at 300 pixels. The middle column sizes automatically depending on the remaining space available. The leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIVs are positioned within the container grid element with the following CSS rules: #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } The “-ms-grid-column” property is used to specify the column associated with the element selected by the style sheet selector. The leftColumn DIV is positioned in the first grid column, the middleColumn DIV is positioned in the second grid column, and the rightColumn DIV is positioned in the third grid column. I find using CSS Grid Layout to be just as intuitive as using an HTML table for layout. You define your columns and rows and then you position different elements within these columns and rows. Very straightforward. Creating Multiple Columns and Rows In the previous section, we created a super simple three-column layout. This layout contained only a single row. In this section, let’s create a slightly more complicated layout which contains more than one row: The following page contains a header row, a content row, and a footer row. The content row contains three columns: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:blue; } #footer { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 3; background-color: orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="header"> Header, Header, Header </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="footer"> Footer, Footer, Footer </div> </div> </body> </html> In the page above, the grid layout is created with the following rule which creates a grid with three rows and three columns: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } The header is created with the following rule: #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } The header is positioned in column 1 and row 1. Furthermore, notice that the “-ms-grid-column-span” property is used to span the header across three columns. CSS Grid Layout and Fractional Units When you use CSS Grid Layout, you can take advantage of fractional units. Fractional units provide you with an easy way of dividing up remaining space in a page. Imagine, for example, that you want to create a three-column page layout. You want the size of the first column to be fixed at 200 pixels and you want to divide the remaining space among the remaining three columns. The width of the second column is equal to the combined width of the third and fourth columns. The following CSS rule creates four columns with the desired widths: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } The fr unit represents a fraction. The grid above contains four columns. The second column is two times the size (2fr) of the third (1fr) and fourth (1fr) columns. When you use the fractional unit, the remaining space is divided up using fractional amounts. Notice that the single row is set to a height of 1fr. The single grid row gobbles up the entire vertical space. Here’s the entire HTML page: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } #firstColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #secondColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #thirdColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } #fourthColumn { -ms-grid-column: 4; background-color:orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="firstColumn"> First Column, First Column, First Column </div> <div id="secondColumn"> Second Column, Second Column, Second Column </div> <div id="thirdColumn"> Third Column, Third Column, Third Column </div> <div id="fourthColumn"> Fourth Column, Fourth Column, Fourth Column </div> </div> </body> </html>   Summary There is more in the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard than discussed in this blog post. My goal was to describe the basics. If you want to learn more than you can read through the entire standard at http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ In this blog post, I described some of the difficulties that you might encounter when attempting to replace HTML tables with Cascading Style Sheets when laying out a web page. I explained how you can take advantage of the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard to avoid these problems when building Metro style applications using JavaScript. CSS 3 Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for laying out a page without requiring you to use HTML table elements.

  Read the article

• Exalogic 2.0.1 Tea Break Snippets - Scripting Asset Creation

  - by The Old Toxophilist

  So far in this series we have looked at creating asset within the EMOC BUI but the Exalogic 2.0.1 installation also provide the Iaas cli as an alternative to most of the common functionality available within EMOC. The IaaS cli interface provides access to the functions that are available to a user logged into the BUI with the CloudUser Role. As such not all functionality is available from the command line interface however having said that the IaaS cli provides all the functionality required to create the Assets within a specific Account (Tenure). Because these action are common and repeatable I decided to wrap the functionality within a simple script that takes a simple input file and creates the Asset. Following the Script through will show us the required steps needed to create the various Assets within an Account and hence I will work through the various functions within the script below describing the steps. You will note from the various steps within the script that it is designed to pause between actions allowing the proceeding action to complete. The reason for this is because we could swamp EMOC with a series of actions and may end up with a situation where we are trying to action a Volume attached before the creation of the vServer and Volume have completed. processAssets() This function simply reads through the passed input file identifying what assets need to be created. An example of the input file can be found below. It can be seen that the input file can be used to create Assets in multiple Accounts during a single run. The order of the entries define the functions that need to be actioned as follows: Input Command Iaas Actions Parameters Production:Connect akm-describe-accounts akm-create-access-key iaas-create-key-pair iaas-describe-vnets iaas-describe-vserver-types iaas-describe-server-templates Username Password Production:Create|vServer iaas-run-vserver vServer Name vServer Type Name Template Name Comma separated list of network names which the vServer will connect to. Comma separated list of IPs for the specified networks. Production:Create|Volume iaas-create-volume Volume Name Volume Size Production:Attach|Volume iaas-attach-volumes-to-vserver vServer Name Comma separated list of volume names Production:Disconnect iaas-delete-key-pair akm-delete-access-key None connectToAccount() It can be seen from the connectToAccount function that before we can execute any Asset creation we must first connect to the appropriate account. To do this we will need the ID associated with the Account. This can be found by executing the akm-describe-accounts cli command which will return a list of all Accounts and there IDs. Once we have the Account ID we generate and Access key using the akm-create-access-key command and then a keypair with the iaas-create-key-pair command. At this point we now have all the information we need to access the specific named account. createVServer() This function simply retrieved the information from the input line and then will create the vServer using the iaas-run-vserver cli command. Reading the function you will notice that it takes the various input names for vServer Type, Template and Networks and converts them into the appropriate IDs. The IaaS cli will not work directly with component names and hence all IDs need to be found. createVolume() Function that simply takes the Volume name and Size then executes the iaas-create-volume command to create the volume. attachVolume() Takes the name of the Volume, which we may have just created, and a Volume then identifies the appropriate IDs before assigning the Volume to the vServer with the iaas-attach-volumes-to-vserver. disconnectFromAccount() Once we have finished connecting to the Account we simply remove the key pair with iaas-delete-key-pair and the access key with akm-delete-access-key although it may be useful to keep this if ssh is required and you do not subsequently modify the sshd information to allow unsecured access. By default the key is required for ssh access when a vServer is created from the command-line. CreateAssets.sh 1 export OCCLI=/opt/sun/occli/bin 2 export IAAS_HOME=/opt/oracle/iaas/cli 3 export JAVA_HOME=/usr/java/latest 4 export IAAS_BASE_URL=https://127.0.0.1 5 export IAAS_ACCESS_KEY_FILE=iaas_access.key 6 export KEY_FILE=iaas_access.pub 7 #CloudUser used to create vServers & Volumes 8 export IAAS_USER=exaprod 9 export IAAS_PASSWORD_FILE=root.pwd 10 export KEY_NAME=cli.recreate 11 export INPUT_FILE=CreateAssets.in 12 13 export ACCOUNTS_FILE=accounts.out 14 export VOLUMES_FILE=volumes.out 15 export DISTGRPS_FILE=distgrp.out 16 export VNETS_FILE=vnets.out 17 export VSERVER_TYPES_FILE=vstype.out 18 export VSERVER_FILE=vserver.out 19 export VSERVER_TEMPLATES=template.out 20 export KEY_PAIRS=keypairs.out 21 22 PROCESSING_ACCOUNT="" 23 24 function cleanTempFiles() { 25 rm -f $ACCOUNTS_FILE $VOLUMES_FILE $DISTGRPS_FILE $VNETS_FILE $VSERVER_TYPES_FILE $VSERVER_FILE $VSERVER_TEMPLATES $KEY_PAIRS $IAAS_PASSWORD_FILE $KEY_FILE $IAAS_ACCESS_KEY_FILE 26 } 27 28 function connectToAccount() { 29 if [[ "$ACCOUNT" != "$PROCESSING_ACCOUNT" ]] 30 then 31 if [[ "" != "$PROCESSING_ACCOUNT" ]] 32 then 33 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-delete-key-pair --key-name $KEY_NAME --access-key-file $IAAS_ACCESS_KEY_FILE 34 $IAAS_HOME/bin/akm-delete-access-key $AK 35 fi 36 PROCESSING_ACCOUNT=$ACCOUNT 37 IAAS_USER=$ACCOUNT_USER 38 echo "$ACCOUNT_PASSWORD" > $IAAS_PASSWORD_FILE 39 $IAAS_HOME/bin/akm-describe-accounts --sep "|" > $ACCOUNTS_FILE 40 while read line 41 do 42 ACCOUNT_ID=${line%%|*} 43 line=${line#*|} 44 ACCOUNT_NAME=${line%%|*} 45 # echo "Id = $ACCOUNT_ID" 46 # echo "Name = $ACCOUNT_NAME" 47 if [[ "$ACCOUNT_NAME" == "$ACCOUNT" ]] 48 then 49 echo "Found Production Account $line" 50 AK=`$IAAS_HOME/bin/akm-create-access-key --account $ACCOUNT_ID --access-key-file $IAAS_ACCESS_KEY_FILE` 51 KEYPAIR=`$IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-create-key-pair --key-name $KEY_NAME --key-file $KEY_FILE` 52 echo "Connected to $ACCOUNT_NAME" 53 break 54 fi 55 done < $ACCOUNTS_FILE 56 fi 57 } 58 59 function disconnectFromAccount() { 60 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-delete-key-pair --key-name $KEY_NAME --access-key-file $IAAS_ACCESS_KEY_FILE 61 $IAAS_HOME/bin/akm-delete-access-key $AK 62 PROCESSING_ACCOUNT="" 63 } 64 65 function getNetworks() { 66 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-describe-vnets --sep "|" > $VNETS_FILE 67 } 68 69 function getVSTypes() { 70 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-describe-vserver-types --sep "|" > $VSERVER_TYPES_FILE 71 } 72 73 function getTemplates() { 74 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-describe-server-templates --sep "|" > $VSERVER_TEMPLATES 75 } 76 77 function getVolumes() { 78 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-describe-volumes --sep "|" > $VOLUMES_FILE 79 } 80 81 function getVServers() { 82 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-describe-vservers --sep "|" > $VSERVER_FILE 83 } 84 85 function getNetworkId() { 86 while read line 87 do 88 NETWORK_ID=${line%%|*} 89 line=${line#*|} 90 NAME=${line%%|*} 91 if [[ "$NAME" == "$NETWORK_NAME" ]] 92 then 93 break 94 fi 95 done < $VNETS_FILE 96 } 97 98 function getVSTypeId() { 99 while read line 100 do 101 VSTYPE_ID=${line%%|*} 102 line=${line#*|} 103 NAME=${line%%|*} 104 if [[ "$VSTYPE_NAME" == "$NAME" ]] 105 then 106 break 107 fi 108 done < $VSERVER_TYPES_FILE 109 } 110 111 function getTemplateId() { 112 while read line 113 do 114 TEMPLATE_ID=${line%%|*} 115 line=${line#*|} 116 NAME=${line%%|*} 117 if [[ "$TEMPLATE_NAME" == "$NAME" ]] 118 then 119 break 120 fi 121 done < $VSERVER_TEMPLATES 122 } 123 124 function getVolumeId() { 125 while read line 126 do 127 export VOLUME_ID=${line%%|*} 128 line=${line#*|} 129 NAME=${line%%|*} 130 if [[ "$NAME" == "$VOLUME_NAME" ]] 131 then 132 break; 133 fi 134 done < $VOLUMES_FILE 135 } 136 137 function getVServerId() { 138 while read line 139 do 140 VSERVER_ID=${line%%|*} 141 line=${line#*|} 142 NAME=${line%%|*} 143 if [[ "$VSERVER_NAME" == "$NAME" ]] 144 then 145 break; 146 fi 147 done < $VSERVER_FILE 148 } 149 150 function getVServerState() { 151 getVServers 152 while read line 153 do 154 VSERVER_ID=${line%%|*} 155 line=${line#*|} 156 NAME=${line%%|*} 157 line=${line#*|} 158 line=${line#*|} 159 VSERVER_STATE=${line%%|*} 160 if [[ "$VSERVER_NAME" == "$NAME" ]] 161 then 162 break; 163 fi 164 done < $VSERVER_FILE 165 } 166 167 function pauseUntilVServerRunning() { 168 # Wait until the Server is running before creating the next 169 getVServerState 170 while [[ "$VSERVER_STATE" != "RUNNING" ]] 171 do 172 getVServerState 173 echo "$NAME $VSERVER_STATE" 174 if [[ "$VSERVER_STATE" != "RUNNING" ]] 175 then 176 echo "Sleeping......." 177 sleep 60 178 fi 179 if [[ "$VSERVER_STATE" == "FAILED" ]] 180 then 181 echo "Will Delete $NAME in 5 Minutes....." 182 sleep 300 183 deleteVServer 184 echo "Deleted $NAME waiting 5 Minutes....." 185 sleep 300 186 break 187 fi 188 done 189 # Lets pause for a minute or two 190 echo "Just Chilling......" 191 sleep 60 192 echo "Ahhhhh we're getting there......." 193 sleep 60 194 echo "I'm almost at one with the universe......." 195 sleep 60 196 echo "Bong Reality Check !" 197 } 198 199 function deleteVServer() { 200 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-terminate-vservers --force --vserver-ids $VSERVER_ID 201 } 202 203 function createVServer() { 204 VSERVER_NAME=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 205 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 206 VSTYPE_NAME=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 207 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 208 TEMPLATE_NAME=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 209 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 210 NETWORK_NAMES=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 211 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 212 IP_ADDRESSES=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 213 # Get Ids associated with names 214 getVSTypeId 215 getTemplateId 216 # Convert Network Names to Ids 217 NETWORK_IDS="" 218 while true 219 do 220 NETWORK_NAME=${NETWORK_NAMES%%,*} 221 NETWORK_NAMES=${NETWORK_NAMES#*,} 222 getNetworkId 223 if [[ "$NETWORK_IDS" != "" ]] 224 then 225 NETWORK_IDS="$NETWORK_IDS,$NETWORK_ID" 226 else 227 NETWORK_IDS=$NETWORK_ID 228 fi 229 if [[ "$NETWORK_NAME" == "$NETWORK_NAMES" ]] 230 then 231 break 232 fi 233 done 234 # Create vServer 235 echo "About to execute : $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-run-vserver --name $VSERVER_NAME --key-name $KEY_NAME --vserver-type $VSTYPE_ID --server-template-id $TEMPLATE_ID --vnets $NETWORK_IDS --ip-addresses $IP_ADDRESSES" 236 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-run-vserver --name $VSERVER_NAME --key-name $KEY_NAME --vserver-type $VSTYPE_ID --server-template-id $TEMPLATE_ID --vnets $NETWORK_IDS --ip-addresses $IP_ADDRESSES 237 pauseUntilVServerRunning 238 } 239 240 function createVolume() { 241 VOLUME_NAME=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 242 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 243 VOLUME_SIZE=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 244 # Create Volume 245 echo "About to execute : $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-create-volume --name $VOLUME_NAME --size $VOLUME_SIZE" 246 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-create-volume --name $VOLUME_NAME --size $VOLUME_SIZE 247 # Lets pause 248 echo "Just Waiting 30 Seconds......" 249 sleep 30 250 } 251 252 function attachVolume() { 253 VSERVER_NAME=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 254 ASSET_DETAILS=${ASSET_DETAILS#*|} 255 VOLUME_NAMES=${ASSET_DETAILS%%|*} 256 # Get vServer Id 257 getVServerId 258 # Convert Volume Names to Ids 259 VOLUME_IDS="" 260 while true 261 do 262 VOLUME_NAME=${VOLUME_NAMES%%,*} 263 VOLUME_NAMES=${VOLUME_NAMES#*,} 264 getVolumeId 265 if [[ "$VOLUME_IDS" != "" ]] 266 then 267 VOLUME_IDS="$VOLUME_IDS,$VOLUME_ID" 268 else 269 VOLUME_IDS=$VOLUME_ID 270 fi 271 if [[ "$VOLUME_NAME" == "$VOLUME_NAMES" ]] 272 then 273 break 274 fi 275 done 276 # Attach Volumes 277 echo "About to execute : $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-attach-volumes-to-vserver --vserver-id $VSERVER_ID --volume-ids $VOLUME_IDS" 278 $IAAS_HOME/bin/iaas-attach-volumes-to-vserver --vserver-id $VSERVER_ID --volume-ids $VOLUME_IDS 279 # Lets pause 280 echo "Just Waiting 30 Seconds......" 281 sleep 30 282 } 283 284 function processAssets() { 285 while read line 286 do 287 ACCOUNT=${line%%:*} 288 line=${line#*:} 289 ACTION=${line%%|*} 290 line=${line#*|} 291 if [[ "$ACTION" == "Connect" ]] 292 then 293 ACCOUNT_USER=${line%%|*} 294 line=${line#*|} 295 ACCOUNT_PASSWORD=${line%%|*} 296 connectToAccount 297 298 ## Account Info 299 getNetworks 300 getVSTypes 301 getTemplates 302 303 continue 304 fi 305 if [[ "$ACTION" == "Create" ]] 306 then 307 ASSET=${line%%|*} 308 line=${line#*|} 309 ASSET_DETAILS=$line 310 if [[ "$ASSET" == "vServer" ]] 311 then 312 createVServer 313 314 continue 315 fi 316 if [[ "$ASSET" == "Volume" ]] 317 then 318 createVolume 319 320 continue 321 fi 322 fi 323 if [[ "$ACTION" == "Attach" ]] 324 then 325 ASSET=${line%%|*} 326 line=${line#*|} 327 ASSET_DETAILS=$line 328 if [[ "$ASSET" == "Volume" ]] 329 then 330 getVolumes 331 getVServers 332 attachVolume 333 334 continue 335 fi 336 fi 337 if [[ "$ACTION" == "Connect" ]] 338 then 339 disconnectFromAccount 340 341 continue 342 fi 343 done < $INPUT_FILE 344 } 345 346 # Should Parameterise this 347 348 while [ $# -gt 0 ] 349 do 350 case "$1" in 351 -a) INPUT_FILE="$2"; shift;; 352 *) echo ""; echo >&2 \ 353 "usage: $0 [-a <Asset Definition File>] (Default is CreateAssets.in)" 354 echo""; exit 1;; 355 *) break;; 356 esac 357 shift 358 done 359 360 361 362 363 processAssets 364 365 echo "**************************************" 366 echo "***** Finished Creating Assets *****" 367 echo "**************************************" 368 CreateAssetsProd.in Production:Connect|exaprod|welcome1 Production:Create|vServer|VS006|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-otd-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.223.13,192.168.0.13,10.117.81.67,172.17.0.14 Production:Create|vServer|VS007|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-otd-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.223.14,192.168.0.14,10.117.81.68,172.17.0.15 Production:Create|vServer|VS008|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.61,192.168.0.61,10.117.81.61,172.17.0.16 Production:Create|vServer|VS009|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.62,192.168.0.62,10.117.81.62,172.17.0.17 Production:Create|vServer|VS000|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.63,192.168.0.63,10.117.81.63,172.17.0.18 Production:Create|vServer|VS001|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.64,192.168.0.64,10.117.81.64,172.17.0.19 Production:Create|vServer|VS002|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.65,192.168.0.65,10.117.81.65,172.17.0.20 Production:Create|vServer|VS003|VSTProduction|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-wls-prod,vn-prod-web,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.225.66,192.168.0.66,10.117.81.66,172.17.0.21 Production:Create|Volume|VS006|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS007|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS008|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS009|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS000|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS001|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS002|50 Production:Create|Volume|VS003|50 Production:Attach|Volume|VS006|VS006 Production:Attach|Volume|VS007|VS007 Production:Attach|Volume|VS008|VS008 Production:Attach|Volume|VS009|VS009 Production:Attach|Volume|VS000|VS000 Production:Attach|Volume|VS001|VS001 Production:Attach|Volume|VS002|VS002 Production:Attach|Volume|VS003|VS003 Production:Disconnect Development:Connect|exadev|welcome1 Development:Create|vServer|VS014|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.24,10.117.81.71,172.17.0.24 Development:Create|vServer|VS015|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.25,10.117.81.72,172.17.0.25 Development:Create|vServer|VS016|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.26,10.117.81.73,172.17.0.26 Development:Create|vServer|VS017|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.27,10.117.81.74,172.17.0.27 Development:Create|vServer|VS018|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.28,10.117.81.75,172.17.0.28 Development:Create|vServer|VS019|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.29,10.117.81.76,172.17.0.29 Development:Create|vServer|VS020|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.30,10.117.81.77,172.17.0.30 Development:Create|vServer|VS021|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.31,10.117.81.78,172.17.0.31 Development:Create|vServer|VS022|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.32,10.117.81.79,172.17.0.32 Development:Create|vServer|VS023|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.33,10.117.81.80,172.17.0.33 Development:Create|vServer|VS024|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.34,10.117.81.81,172.17.0.34 Development:Create|vServer|VS025|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.35,10.117.81.82,172.17.0.35 Development:Create|vServer|VS026|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.36,10.117.81.83,172.17.0.36 Development:Create|vServer|VS027|VSTDevelopment|BaseOEL56ServerTemplate|EoIB-development,IPoIB-default,IPoIB-vserver-shared-storage|10.51.224.37,10.117.81.84,172.17.0.37 Development:Create|Volume|VS014|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS015|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS016|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS017|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS018|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS019|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS020|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS021|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS022|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS023|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS024|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS025|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS026|50 Development:Create|Volume|VS027|50 Development:Attach|Volume|VS014|VS014 Development:Attach|Volume|VS015|VS015 Development:Attach|Volume|VS016|VS016 Development:Attach|Volume|VS017|VS017 Development:Attach|Volume|VS018|VS018 Development:Attach|Volume|VS019|VS019 Development:Attach|Volume|VS020|VS020 Development:Attach|Volume|VS021|VS021 Development:Attach|Volume|VS022|VS022 Development:Attach|Volume|VS023|VS023 Development:Attach|Volume|VS024|VS024 Development:Attach|Volume|VS025|VS025 Development:Attach|Volume|VS026|VS026 Development:Attach|Volume|VS027|VS027 Development:Disconnect This entry was originally posted on the The Old Toxophilist Site.

  Read the article

• Currency Conversion in Oracle BI applications

  - by Saurabh Verma

  Authored by Vijay Aggarwal and Hichem Sellami A typical data warehouse contains Star and/or Snowflake schema, made up of Dimensions and Facts. The facts store various numerical information including amounts. Example; Order Amount, Invoice Amount etc. With the true global nature of business now-a-days, the end-users want to view the reports in their own currency or in global/common currency as defined by their business. This presents a unique opportunity in BI to provide the amounts in converted rates either by pre-storing or by doing on-the-fly conversions while displaying the reports to the users. Source Systems OBIA caters to various source systems like EBS, PSFT, Sebl, JDE, Fusion etc. Each source has its own unique and intricate ways of defining and storing currency data, doing currency conversions and presenting to the OLTP users. For example; EBS stores conversion rates between currencies which can be classified by conversion rates, like Corporate rate, Spot rate, Period rate etc. Siebel stores exchange rates by conversion rates like Daily. EBS/Fusion stores the conversion rates for each day, where as PSFT/Siebel store for a range of days. PSFT has Rate Multiplication Factor and Rate Division Factor and we need to calculate the Rate based on them, where as other Source systems store the Currency Exchange Rate directly. OBIA Design The data consolidation from various disparate source systems, poses the challenge to conform various currencies, rate types, exchange rates etc., and designing the best way to present the amounts to the users without affecting the performance. When consolidating the data for reporting in OBIA, we have designed the mechanisms in the Common Dimension, to allow users to report based on their required currencies. OBIA Facts store amounts in various currencies: Document Currency: This is the currency of the actual transaction. For a multinational company, this can be in various currencies. Local Currency: This is the base currency in which the accounting entries are recorded by the business. This is generally defined in the Ledger of the company. Global Currencies: OBIA provides five Global Currencies. Three are used across all modules. The last two are for CRM only. A Global currency is very useful when creating reports where the data is viewed enterprise-wide. Example; a US based multinational would want to see the reports in USD. The company will choose USD as one of the global currencies. OBIA allows users to define up-to five global currencies during the initial implementation. The term Currency Preference is used to designate the set of values: Document Currency, Local Currency, Global Currency 1, Global Currency 2, Global Currency 3; which are shared among all modules. There are four more currency preferences, specific to certain modules: Global Currency 4 (aka CRM Currency) and Global Currency 5 which are used in CRM; and Project Currency and Contract Currency, used in Project Analytics. When choosing Local Currency for Currency preference, the data will show in the currency of the Ledger (or Business Unit) in the prompt. So it is important to select one Ledger or Business Unit when viewing data in Local Currency. More on this can be found in the section: Toggling Currency Preferences in the Dashboard. Design Logic When extracting the fact data, the OOTB mappings extract and load the document amount, and the local amount in target tables. It also loads the exchange rates required to convert the document amount into the corresponding global amounts. If the source system only provides the document amount in the transaction, the extract mapping does a lookup to get the Local currency code, and the Local exchange rate. The Load mapping then uses the local currency code and rate to derive the local amount. The load mapping also fetches the Global Currencies and looks up the corresponding exchange rates. The lookup of exchange rates is done via the Exchange Rate Dimension provided as a Common/Conforming Dimension in OBIA. The Exchange Rate Dimension stores the exchange rates between various currencies for a date range and Rate Type. Two physical tables W_EXCH_RATE_G and W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G are used to provide the lookups and conversions between currencies. The data is loaded from the source system’s Ledger tables. W_EXCH_RATE_G stores the exchange rates between currencies with a date range. On the other hand, W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G stores the currency conversions between the document currency and the pre-defined five Global Currencies for each day. Based on the requirements, the fact mappings can decide and use one or both tables to do the conversion. Currency design in OBIA also taps into the MLS and Domain architecture, thus allowing the users to map the currencies to a universal Domain during the implementation time. This is especially important for companies deploying and using OBIA with multiple source adapters. Some Gotchas to Look for It is necessary to think through the currencies during the initial implementation. 1) Identify various types of currencies that are used by your business. Understand what will be your Local (or Base) and Documentation currency. Identify various global currencies that your users will want to look at the reports. This will be based on the global nature of your business. Changes to these currencies later in the project, while permitted, but may cause Full data loads and hence lost time. 2) If the user has a multi source system make sure that the Global Currencies and Global Rate Types chosen in Configuration Manager do have the corresponding source specific counterparts. In other words, make sure for every DW specific value chosen for Currency Code or Rate Type, there is a source Domain mapping already done. Technical Section This section will briefly mention the technical scenarios employed in the OBIA adaptors to extract data from each source system. In OBIA, we have two main tables which store the Currency Rate information as explained in previous sections. W_EXCH_RATE_G and W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G are the two tables. W_EXCH_RATE_G stores all the Currency Conversions present in the source system. It captures data for a Date Range. W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G has Global Currency Conversions stored at a Daily level. However the challenge here is to store all the 5 Global Currency Exchange Rates in a single record for each From Currency. Let’s voyage further into the Source System Extraction logic for each of these tables and understand the flow briefly. EBS: In EBS, we have Currency Data stored in GL_DAILY_RATES table. As the name indicates GL_DAILY_RATES EBS table has data at a daily level. However in our warehouse we store the data with a Date Range and insert a new range record only when the Exchange Rate changes for a particular From Currency, To Currency and Rate Type. Below are the main logical steps that we employ in this process. (Incremental Flow only) – Cleanup the data in W_EXCH_RATE_G. Delete the records which have Start Date > minimum conversion date Update the End Date of the existing records. Compress the daily data from GL_DAILY_RATES table into Range Records. Incremental map uses $$XRATE_UPD_NUM_DAY as an extra parameter. Generate Previous Rate, Previous Date and Next Date for each of the Daily record from the OLTP. Filter out the records which have Conversion Rate same as Previous Rates or if the Conversion Date lies within a single day range. Mark the records as ‘Keep’ and ‘Filter’ and also get the final End Date for the single Range record (Unique Combination of From Date, To Date, Rate and Conversion Date). Filter the records marked as ‘Filter’ in the INFA map. The above steps will load W_EXCH_RATE_GS. Step 0 updates/deletes W_EXCH_RATE_G directly. SIL map will then insert/update the GS data into W_EXCH_RATE_G. These steps convert the daily records in GL_DAILY_RATES to Range records in W_EXCH_RATE_G. We do not need such special logic for loading W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G. This is a table where we store data at a Daily Granular Level. However we need to pivot the data because the data present in multiple rows in source tables needs to be stored in different columns of the same row in DW. We use GROUP BY and CASE logic to achieve this. Fusion: Fusion has extraction logic very similar to EBS. The only difference is that the Cleanup logic that was mentioned in step 0 above does not use $$XRATE_UPD_NUM_DAY parameter. In Fusion we bring all the Exchange Rates in Incremental as well and do the cleanup. The SIL then takes care of Insert/Updates accordingly. PeopleSoft:PeopleSoft does not have From Date and To Date explicitly in the Source tables. Let’s look at an example. Please note that this is achieved from PS1 onwards only. 1 Jan 2010 – USD to INR – 45 31 Jan 2010 – USD to INR – 46 PSFT stores records in above fashion. This means that Exchange Rate of 45 for USD to INR is applicable for 1 Jan 2010 to 30 Jan 2010. We need to store data in this fashion in DW. Also PSFT has Exchange Rate stored as RATE_MULT and RATE_DIV. We need to do a RATE_MULT/RATE_DIV to get the correct Exchange Rate. We generate From Date and To Date while extracting data from source and this has certain assumptions: If a record gets updated/inserted in the source, it will be extracted in incremental. Also if this updated/inserted record is between other dates, then we also extract the preceding and succeeding records (based on dates) of this record. This is required because we need to generate a range record and we have 3 records whose ranges have changed. Taking the same example as above, if there is a new record which gets inserted on 15 Jan 2010; the new ranges are 1 Jan to 14 Jan, 15 Jan to 30 Jan and 31 Jan to Next available date. Even though 1 Jan record and 31 Jan have not changed, we will still extract them because the range is affected. Similar logic is used for Global Exchange Rate Extraction. We create the Range records and get it into a Temporary table. Then we join to Day Dimension, create individual records and pivot the data to get the 5 Global Exchange Rates for each From Currency, Date and Rate Type. Siebel: Siebel Facts are dependent on Global Exchange Rates heavily and almost none of them really use individual Exchange Rates. In other words, W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G is the main table used in Siebel from PS1 release onwards. As of January 2002, the Euro Triangulation method for converting between currencies belonging to EMU members is not needed for present and future currency exchanges. However, the method is still available in Siebel applications, as are the old currencies, so that historical data can be maintained accurately. The following description applies only to historical data needing conversion prior to the 2002 switch to the Euro for the EMU member countries. If a country is a member of the European Monetary Union (EMU), you should convert its currency to other currencies through the Euro. This is called triangulation, and it is used whenever either currency being converted has EMU Triangulation checked. Due to this, there are multiple extraction flows in SEBL ie. EUR to EMU, EUR to NonEMU, EUR to DMC and so on. We load W_EXCH_RATE_G through multiple flows with these data. This has been kept same as previous versions of OBIA. W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G being a new table does not have such needs. However SEBL does not have From Date and To Date columns in the Source tables similar to PSFT. We use similar extraction logic as explained in PSFT section for SEBL as well. What if all 5 Global Currencies configured are same? As mentioned in previous sections, from PS1 onwards we store Global Exchange Rates in W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G table. The extraction logic for this table involves Pivoting data from multiple rows into a single row with 5 Global Exchange Rates in 5 columns. As mentioned in previous sections, we use CASE and GROUP BY functions to achieve this. This approach poses a unique problem when all the 5 Global Currencies Chosen are same. For example – If the user configures all 5 Global Currencies as ‘USD’ then the extract logic will not be able to generate a record for From Currency=USD. This is because, not all Source Systems will have a USD->USD conversion record. We have _Generated mappings to take care of this case. We generate a record with Conversion Rate=1 for such cases. Reusable Lookups Before PS1, we had a Mapplet for Currency Conversions. In PS1, we only have reusable Lookups- LKP_W_EXCH_RATE_G and LKP_W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G. These lookups have another layer of logic so that all the lookup conditions are met when they are used in various Fact Mappings. Any user who would want to do a LKP on W_EXCH_RATE_G or W_GLOBAL_EXCH_RATE_G should and must use these Lookups. A direct join or Lookup on the tables might lead to wrong data being returned. Changing Currency preferences in the Dashboard: In the 796x series, all amount metrics in OBIA were showing the Global1 amount. The customer needed to change the metric definitions to show them in another Currency preference. Project Analytics started supporting currency preferences since 7.9.6 release though, and it published a Tech note for other module customers to add toggling between currency preferences to the solution. List of Currency Preferences Starting from 11.1.1.x release, the BI Platform added a new feature to support multiple currencies. The new session variable (PREFERRED_CURRENCY) is populated through a newly introduced currency prompt. This prompt can take its values from the xml file: userpref_currencies_OBIA.xml, which is hosted in the BI Server installation folder, under :< home>\instances\instance1\config\OracleBIPresentationServicesComponent\coreapplication_obips1\userpref_currencies.xml This file contains the list of currency preferences, like“Local Currency”, “Global Currency 1”,…which customers can also rename to give them more meaningful business names. There are two options for showing the list of currency preferences to the user in the dashboard: Static and Dynamic. In Static mode, all users will see the full list as in the user preference currencies file. In the Dynamic mode, the list shown in the currency prompt drop down is a result of a dynamic query specified in the same file. Customers can build some security into the rpd, so the list of currency preferences will be based on the user roles…BI Applications built a subject area: “Dynamic Currency Preference” to run this query, and give every user only the list of currency preferences required by his application roles. Adding Currency to an Amount Field When the user selects one of the items from the currency prompt, all the amounts in that page will show in the Currency corresponding to that preference. For example, if the user selects “Global Currency1” from the prompt, all data will be showing in Global Currency 1 as specified in the Configuration Manager. If the user select “Local Currency”, all amount fields will show in the Currency of the Business Unit selected in the BU filter of the same page. If there is no particular Business Unit selected in that filter, and the data selected by the query contains amounts in more than one currency (for example one BU has USD as a functional currency, the other has EUR as functional currency), then subtotals will not be available (cannot add USD and EUR amounts in one field), and depending on the set up (see next paragraph), the user may receive an error. There are two ways to add the Currency field to an amount metric: In the form of currency code, like USD, EUR…For this the user needs to add the field “Apps Common Currency Code” to the report. This field is in every subject area, usually under the table “Currency Tag” or “Currency Code”… In the form of currency symbol ($ for USD, € for EUR,…) For this, the user needs to format the amount metrics in the report as a currency column, by specifying the currency tag column in the Column Properties option in Column Actions drop down list. Typically this column should be the “BI Common Currency Code” available in every subject area. Select Column Properties option in the Edit list of a metric. In the Data Format tab, select Custom as Treat Number As. Enter the following syntax under Custom Number Format: [$:currencyTagColumn=Subjectarea.table.column] Where Column is the “BI Common Currency Code” defined to take the currency code value based on the currency preference chosen by the user in the Currency preference prompt.

  Read the article

• Metro Walkthrough: Creating a Task List with a ListView and IndexedDB

  - by Stephen.Walther

  The goal of this blog entry is to describe how you can work with data in a Metro style application written with JavaScript. In particular, we create a super simple Task List application which enables you to create and delete tasks. Here’s a video which demonstrates how the Task List application works: In order to build this application, I had to take advantage of several features of the WinJS library and technologies including: IndexedDB – The Task List application stores data in an IndexedDB database. HTML5 Form Validation – The Task List application uses HTML5 validation to ensure that a required field has a value. ListView Control – The Task List application displays the tasks retrieved from the IndexedDB database in a WinJS ListView control. Creating the IndexedDB Database The Task List application stores all of its data in an IndexedDB database named TasksDB. This database is opened/created with the following code: var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; The msIndexedDB.open() method accepts two parameters: the name of the database to open and the version of the database to open. If a database with a matching version already exists, then calling the msIndexedDB.open() method opens a connection to the existing database. If the database does not exist then the upgradeneeded event is raised. You handle the upgradeneeded event to create a new database. In the code above, the upgradeneeded event handler creates an object store named “tasks” (An object store roughly corresponds to a database table). When you add items to the tasks object store then each item gets an id property with an auto-incremented value automatically. The code above also includes an error event handler. If the IndexedDB database cannot be opened or created, for whatever reason, then an error message is written to the Visual Studio JavaScript Console window. Displaying a List of Tasks The TaskList application retrieves its list of tasks from the tasks object store, which we created above, and displays the list of tasks in a ListView control. Here is how the ListView control is declared: <div id="tasksListView" data-win-control="WinJS.UI.ListView" data-win-options="{ itemDataSource: TaskList.tasks.dataSource, itemTemplate: select('#taskTemplate'), tapBehavior: 'toggleSelect', selectionMode: 'multi', layout: { type: WinJS.UI.ListLayout } }"> </div> The ListView control is bound to the TaskList.tasks.dataSource data source. The TaskList.tasks.dataSource is created with the following code: // Create the data source var tasks = new WinJS.Binding.List(); // Open the database var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; // Load the data source with data from the database req.onsuccess = function () { db = req.result; var tran = db.transaction("tasks"); tran.objectStore("tasks").openCursor().onsuccess = function(event) { var cursor = event.target.result; if (cursor) { tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, cursor.value); cursor.continue(); }; }; }; // Expose the data source and functions WinJS.Namespace.define("TaskList", { tasks: tasks }); Notice the success event handler. This handler is called when a database is successfully opened/created. In the code above, all of the items from the tasks object store are retrieved into a cursor and added to a WinJS.Binding.List object named tasks. Because the ListView control is bound to the WinJS.Binding.List object, copying the tasks from the object store into the WinJS.Binding.List object causes the tasks to appear in the ListView: Adding a New Task You add a new task in the Task List application by entering the title of a new task into an HTML form and clicking the Add button. Here’s the markup for creating the form: <form id="addTaskForm"> <input id="newTaskTitle" title="New Task" required /> <button>Add</button> </form> Notice that the INPUT element includes a required attribute. In a Metro application, you can take advantage of HTML5 Validation to validate form fields. If you don’t enter a value for the newTaskTitle field then the following validation error message is displayed: For a brief introduction to HTML5 validation, see my previous blog entry: http://stephenwalther.com/blog/archive/2012/03/13/html5-form-validation.aspx When you click the Add button, the form is submitted and the form submit event is raised. The following code is executed in the default.js file: // Handle Add Task document.getElementById("addTaskForm").addEventListener("submit", function (evt) { evt.preventDefault(); var newTaskTitle = document.getElementById("newTaskTitle"); TaskList.addTask({ title: newTaskTitle.value }); newTaskTitle.value = ""; }); The code above retrieves the title of the new task and calls the addTask() method in the tasks.js file. Here’s the code for the addTask() method which is responsible for actually adding the new task to the IndexedDB database: // Add a new task function addTask(taskToAdd) { var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", "readwrite"); var addRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").add(taskToAdd); addRequest.onsuccess = function (evt) { taskToAdd.id = evt.target.result; tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, taskToAdd); } } The code above does two things. First, it adds the new task to the tasks object store in the IndexedDB database. Second, it adds the new task to the data source bound to the ListView. The dataSource.insertAtEnd() method is called to add the new task to the data source so the new task will appear in the ListView (with a nice little animation). Deleting Existing Tasks The Task List application enables you to select one or more tasks by clicking or tapping on one or more tasks in the ListView. When you click the Delete button, the selected tasks are removed from both the IndexedDB database and the ListView. For example, in the following screenshot, two tasks are selected. The selected tasks appear with a teal background and a checkmark: When you click the Delete button, the following code in the default.js file is executed: // Handle Delete Tasks document.getElementById("btnDeleteTasks").addEventListener("click", function (evt) { tasksListView.winControl.selection.getItems().then(function(items) { items.forEach(function (item) { TaskList.deleteTask(item); }); }); }); The selected tasks are retrieved with the TaskList selection.getItem() method. In the code above, the deleteTask() method is called for each of the selected tasks. Here’s the code for the deleteTask() method: // Delete an existing task function deleteTask(listViewItem) { // Database key != ListView key var dbKey = listViewItem.data.id; var listViewKey = listViewItem.key; // Remove item from db and, if success, remove item from ListView var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", “readwrite”); var deleteRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").delete(dbKey); deleteRequest.onsuccess = function () { tasks.dataSource.remove(listViewKey); } } This code does two things: it deletes the existing task from the database and removes the existing task from the ListView. In both cases, the right task is removed by using the key associated with the task. However, the task key is different in the case of the database and in the case of the ListView. In the case of the database, the task key is the value of the task id property. In the case of the ListView, on the other hand, the task key is auto-generated by the ListView. When the task is removed from the ListView, an animation is used to collapse the tasks which appear above and below the task which was removed. The Complete Code Above, I did a lot of jumping around between different files in the application and I left out sections of code. For the sake of completeness, I want to include the entire code here: the default.html, default.js, and tasks.js files. Here are the contents of the default.html file. This file contains the UI for the Task List application: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <meta charset="utf-8"> <title>Task List</title> <!-- WinJS references --> <link href="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/css/ui-dark.css" rel="stylesheet"> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/js/base.js"></script> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/js/ui.js"></script> <!-- TaskList references --> <link href="/css/default.css" rel="stylesheet"> <script src="/js/default.js"></script> <script type="text/javascript" src="js/tasks.js"></script> <style type="text/css"> body { font-size: x-large; } form { display: inline; } #appContainer { margin: 20px; width: 600px; } .win-container { padding: 10px; } </style> </head> <body> <div> <!-- Templates --> <div id="taskTemplate" data-win-control="WinJS.Binding.Template"> <div> <span data-win-bind="innerText:title"></span> </div> </div> <h1>Super Task List</h1> <div id="appContainer"> <form id="addTaskForm"> <input id="newTaskTitle" title="New Task" required /> <button>Add</button> </form> <button id="btnDeleteTasks">Delete</button> <div id="tasksListView" data-win-control="WinJS.UI.ListView" data-win-options="{ itemDataSource: TaskList.tasks.dataSource, itemTemplate: select('#taskTemplate'), tapBehavior: 'toggleSelect', selectionMode: 'multi', layout: { type: WinJS.UI.ListLayout } }"> </div> </div> </div> </body> </html> Here is the code for the default.js file. This code wires up the Add Task form and Delete button: (function () { "use strict"; var app = WinJS.Application; app.onactivated = function (eventObject) { if (eventObject.detail.kind === Windows.ApplicationModel.Activation.ActivationKind.launch) { WinJS.UI.processAll().then(function () { // Get reference to Tasks ListView var tasksListView = document.getElementById("tasksListView"); // Handle Add Task document.getElementById("addTaskForm").addEventListener("submit", function (evt) { evt.preventDefault(); var newTaskTitle = document.getElementById("newTaskTitle"); TaskList.addTask({ title: newTaskTitle.value }); newTaskTitle.value = ""; }); // Handle Delete Tasks document.getElementById("btnDeleteTasks").addEventListener("click", function (evt) { tasksListView.winControl.selection.getItems().then(function(items) { items.forEach(function (item) { TaskList.deleteTask(item); }); }); }); }); } }; app.start(); })(); Finally, here is the tasks.js file. This file contains all of the code for opening, creating, and interacting with IndexedDB: (function () { "use strict"; // Create the data source var tasks = new WinJS.Binding.List(); // Open the database var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; // Load the data source with data from the database req.onsuccess = function () { db = req.result; var tran = db.transaction("tasks"); tran.objectStore("tasks").openCursor().onsuccess = function(event) { var cursor = event.target.result; if (cursor) { tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, cursor.value); cursor.continue(); }; }; }; // Add a new task function addTask(taskToAdd) { var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", "readwrite"); var addRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").add(taskToAdd); addRequest.onsuccess = function (evt) { taskToAdd.id = evt.target.result; tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, taskToAdd); } } // Delete an existing task function deleteTask(listViewItem) { // Database key != ListView key var dbKey = listViewItem.data.id; var listViewKey = listViewItem.key; // Remove item from db and, if success, remove item from ListView var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", "readwrite"); var deleteRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").delete(dbKey); deleteRequest.onsuccess = function () { tasks.dataSource.remove(listViewKey); } } // Expose the data source and functions WinJS.Namespace.define("TaskList", { tasks: tasks, addTask: addTask, deleteTask: deleteTask }); })(); Summary I wrote this blog entry because I wanted to create a walkthrough of building a simple database-driven application. In particular, I wanted to demonstrate how you can use a ListView control with an IndexedDB database to store and retrieve database data.

  Read the article

• Azure WNS to Win8 - Push Notifications for Metro Apps

  - by JoshReuben

  Background The Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 allows you to build a Windows Azure Cloud Service that can send Push Notifications to registered Metro apps via Windows Notification Service (WNS). Some configuration is required - you need to: Register the Metro app for Windows Live Application Management Provide Package SID & Client Secret to WNS Modify the Azure Cloud App cscfg file and the Metro app package.appxmanifest file to contain matching Metro package name, SID and client secret. The Mechanism: These notifications take the form of XAML Tile, Toast, Raw or Badge UI notifications. The core engine is provided via the WNS nuget recipe, which exposes an API for constructing payloads and posting notifications to WNS. An application receives push notifications by requesting a notification channel from WNS, which returns a channel URI that the application then registers with a cloud service. In the cloud service, A WnsAccessTokenProvider authenticates with WNS by providing its credentials, the package SID and secret key, and receives in return an access token that the provider caches and can reuse for multiple notification requests. The cloud service constructs a notification request by filling out a template class that contains the information that will be sent with the notification, including text and image references. Using the channel URI of a registered client, the cloud service can then send a notification whenever it has an update for the user. The package contains the NotificationSendUtils class for submitting notifications. The Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 (WAT) provides the PNWorker sample pair of solutions - The Azure server side contains a WebRole & a WorkerRole. The WebRole allows submission of new push notifications into an Azure Queue which the WorkerRole extracts and processes. Further background resources: http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/ - Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Push%20Notification%20Worker%20Sample - WAT WNS sample setup http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Using%20the%20Windows%208%20Cloud%20Application%20Services%20Application – using Windows 8 with Cloud Application Services A bit of Configuration Register the Metro apps for Windows Live Application Management From the current app manifest of your metro app Publish tab, copy the Package Display Name and the Publisher From: https://manage.dev.live.com/Build/ Package name: <-- we need to change this Client secret: keep this Package Security Identifier (SID): keep this Verify the app here: https://manage.dev.live.com/Applications/Index - so this step is done "If you wish to send push notifications in your application, provide your Package Security Identifier (SID) and client secret to WNS." Provide Package SID & Client Secret to WNS http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh465407.aspx - How to authenticate with WNS https://appdev.microsoft.com/StorePortals/en-us/Account/Signup/PurchaseSubscription - register app with dashboard - need registration code or register a new account & pay $170 shekels http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh868184.aspx - Registering for a Windows Store developer account http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh868187.aspx - Picking a Microsoft account for the Windows Store The WNS Nuget Recipe The WNS Recipe is a nuget package that provides an API for authenticating against WNS, constructing payloads and posting notifications to WNS. After installing this package, a WnsRecipe assembly is added to project references. To send notifications using WNS, first register the application at the Windows Push Notifications & Live Connect portal to obtain Package Security Identifier (SID) and a secret key that your cloud service uses to authenticate with WNS. An application receives push notifications by requesting a notification channel from WNS, which returns a channel URI that the application then registers with a cloud service. In the cloud service, the WnsAccessTokenProvider authenticates with WNS by providing its credentials, the package SID and secret key, and receives in return an access token that the provider caches and can reuse for multiple notification requests. The cloud service constructs a notification request by filling out a template class that contains the information that will be sent with the notification, including text and image references.Using the channel URI of a registered client, the cloud service can then send a notification whenever it has an update for the user. var provider = new WnsAccessTokenProvider(clientId, clientSecret); var notification = new ToastNotification(provider) {     ToastType = ToastType.ToastText02,     Text = new List<string> { "blah"} }; notification.Send(channelUri); the WNS Recipe is instrumented to write trace information via a trace listener – configuratively or programmatically from Application_Start(): WnsDiagnostics.Enable(); WnsDiagnostics.TraceSource.Listeners.Add(new DiagnosticMonitorTraceListener()); WnsDiagnostics.TraceSource.Switch.Level = SourceLevels.Verbose; The WAT PNWorker Sample The Azure server side contains a WebRole & a WorkerRole. The WebRole allows submission of new push notifications into an Azure Queue which the WorkerRole extracts and processes. Overview of Push Notification Worker Sample The toolkit includes a sample application based on the same solution structure as the one created by theWindows 8 Cloud Application Services project template. The sample demonstrates how to off-load the job of sending Windows Push Notifications using a Windows Azure worker role. You can find the source code in theSamples\PNWorker folder. This folder contains a full version of the sample application showing how to use Windows Push Notifications using ASP.NET Membership as the authentication mechanism. The sample contains two different solution files: WATWindows.Azure.sln: This solution must be opened with Visual Studio 2010 and contains the projects related to the Windows Azure web and worker roles. WATWindows.Client.sln: This solution must be opened with Visual Studio 11 and contains the Windows Metro style application project. Only Visual Studio 2010 supports Windows Azure cloud projects so you currently need to use this edition to launch the server application. This will change in a future release of the Windows Azure tools when support for Visual Studio 11 is enabled. Important: Setting up the PNWorker Sample Before running the PNWorker sample, you need to register the application and configure it: 1. Register the app: To register your application, go to the Windows Live Application Management site for Metro style apps at https://manage.dev.live.com/build and sign in with your Windows Live ID. In the Windows Push Notifications & Live Connect page, enter the following information. Package Display Name PNWorker.Sample Publisher CN=127.0.0.1, O=TESTING ONLY, OU=Windows Azure DevFabric 2. 3. Once you register the application, make a note of the values shown in the portal for Client Secret,Package Name and Package SID. 4. Configure the app - double-click the SetupSample.cmd file located inside the Samples\PNWorker folder to launch a tool that will guide you through the process of configuring the sample. setup runs a PowerShell script that requires running with administration privileges to allow the scripts to execute in your machine. When prompted, enter the Client Secret, Package Name, and Package Security Identifier you obtained previously and wait until the tool finishes configuring your sample. Running the PNWorker Sample To run this sample, you must run both the client and the server application projects. 1. Open Visual Studio 2010 as an administrator. Open the WATWindows.Azure.sln solution. Set the start-up project of the solution as the cloud project. Run the app in the dev fabric to test. 2. Open Visual Studio 11 and open the WATWindows.Client.sln solution. Run the Metro client application. In the client application, click Reopen channel and send to server. à the application opens the channel and registers it with the cloud application, & the Output area shows the channel URI. 3. Refresh the WebRole's Push Notifications page to see the UI list the newly registered client. 4. Send notifications to the client application by clicking the Send Notification button. Setup 3 command files + 1 powershell script: SetupSample.cmd –> SetupWPNS.vbs –> SetupWPNS.cmd –> SetupWPNS.UpdateWPNSCredentialsInServiceConfiguration.ps1 appears to set PackageName – from manifest Client Id package security id (SID) – from registration Client Secret – from registration The following configs are modified: WATWindows\ServiceConfiguration.Cloud.cscfg WATWindows\ServiceConfiguration.Local.cscfg WATWindows.Client\package.appxmanifest WatWindows.Notifications A class library – it references the following WNS DLL: C:\WorkDev\CountdownValue\AzureToolkits\WATWindows8\Samples\PNWorker\packages\WnsRecipe.0.0.3.0\lib\net40\WnsRecipe.dll NotificationJobRequest A DataContract for triggering notifications:     using System.Runtime.Serialization; using Microsoft.Windows.Samples.Notifications;     [DataContract]     [KnownType(typeof(WnsAccessTokenProvider))] public class NotificationJobRequest     {               [DataMember] public bool ProcessAsync { get; set; }          [DataMember] public string Payload { get; set; }         [DataMember] public string ChannelUrl { get; set; }         [DataMember] public NotificationType NotificationType { get; set; }         [DataMember] public IAccessTokenProvider AccessTokenProvider { get; set; }         [DataMember] public NotificationSendOptions NotificationSendOptions{ get; set; }     } Investigated these types: WnsAccessTokenProvider – a DataContract that contains the client Id and client secret NotificationType – an enum that can be: Tile, Toast, badge, Raw IAccessTokenProvider – get or reset the access token NotificationSendOptions – SecondsTTL, NotificationPriority (enum), isCache, isRequestForStatus, Tag   There is also a NotificationJobSerializer class which basically wraps a DataContractSerializer serialization / deserialization of NotificationJobRequest The WNSNotificationJobProcessor class This class wraps the NotificationSendUtils API – it periodically extracts any NotificationJobRequest objects from a CloudQueue and submits them to WNS. The ProcessJobMessageRequest method – this is the punchline: it will deserialize a CloudQueueMessage into a NotificationJobRequest & send pass its contents to NotificationUtils to SendAsynchronously / SendSynchronously, (and then dequeue the message).     public override void ProcessJobMessageRequest(CloudQueueMessage notificationJobMessageRequest)         { Trace.WriteLine("Processing a new Notification Job Request", "Information"); NotificationJobRequest pushNotificationJob =                 NotificationJobSerializer.Deserialize(notificationJobMessageRequest.AsString); if (pushNotificationJob != null)             { if (pushNotificationJob.ProcessAsync)                 { Trace.WriteLine("Sending the notification asynchronously", "Information"); NotificationSendUtils.SendAsynchronously( new Uri(pushNotificationJob.ChannelUrl),                         pushNotificationJob.AccessTokenProvider,                         pushNotificationJob.Payload,                         result => this.ProcessSendResult(pushNotificationJob, result),                         result => this.ProcessSendResultError(pushNotificationJob, result),                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationType,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationSendOptions);                 } else                 { Trace.WriteLine("Sending the notification synchronously", "Information"); NotificationSendResult result = NotificationSendUtils.Send( new Uri(pushNotificationJob.ChannelUrl),                         pushNotificationJob.AccessTokenProvider,                         pushNotificationJob.Payload,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationType,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationSendOptions); this.ProcessSendResult(pushNotificationJob, result);                 }             } else             { Trace.WriteLine("Could not deserialize the notification job", "Error");             } this.queue.DeleteMessage(notificationJobMessageRequest);         } Investigation of NotificationSendUtils class - This is the engine – it exposes Send and a SendAsyncronously overloads that take the following params from the NotificationJobRequest: Channel Uri AccessTokenProvider Payload NotificationType NotificationSendOptions WebRole WebRole is a large MVC project – it references WatWindows.Notifications as well as the following WNS DLL: \AzureToolkits\WATWindows8\Samples\PNWorker\packages\WnsRecipe.0.0.3.0\lib\net40\NotificationsExtensions.dll Controllers\PushNotificationController.cs Notification related namespaces:     using Notifications;     using NotificationsExtensions;     using NotificationsExtensions.BadgeContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.RawContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.TileContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.ToastContent;     using Windows.Samples.Notifications; TokenProvider – initialized from the Azure RoleEnvironment:   IAccessTokenProvider tokenProvider = new WnsAccessTokenProvider(         RoleEnvironment.GetConfigurationSettingValue("WNSPackageSID"),         RoleEnvironment.GetConfigurationSettingValue("WNSClientSecret")); SendNotification method – calls QueuePushMessage method to create and serialize a NotificationJobRequest and enqueue it in a CloudQueue [HttpPost]         public ActionResult SendNotification(             [ModelBinder(typeof(NotificationTemplateModelBinder))] INotificationContent notification,             string channelUrl,             NotificationPriority priority = NotificationPriority.Normal)         {             var payload = notification.GetContent();             var options = new NotificationSendOptions()             {                 Priority = priority             };             var notificationType =                 notification is IBadgeNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Badge :                 notification is IRawNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Raw :                 notification is ITileNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Tile :                 NotificationType.Toast;             this.QueuePushMessage(payload, channelUrl, notificationType, options);             object response = new             {                 Status = "Queued for delivery to WNS"             };             return this.Json(response);         } GetSendTemplate method: Create the cshtml partial rendering based on the notification type     [HttpPost]         public ActionResult GetSendTemplate(NotificationTemplateViewModel templateOptions)         {             PartialViewResult result = null;             switch (templateOptions.NotificationType)             {                 case "Badge":                     templateOptions.BadgeGlyphValueContent = Enum.GetNames(typeof( GlyphValue));                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;                 case "Raw":                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_Raw");                     break;                 case "Toast":                     templateOptions.TileImages = this.blobClient.GetAllBlobsInContainer(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("TileImagesContainer")).OrderBy(i => i.FileName).ToList();                     templateOptions.ToastAudioContent = Enum.GetNames(typeof( ToastAudioContent));                     templateOptions.Priorities = Enum.GetNames(typeof( NotificationPriority));                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;                 case "Tile":                     templateOptions.TileImages = this.blobClient.GetAllBlobsInContainer(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("TileImagesContainer")).OrderBy(i => i.FileName).ToList();                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;             }             return result;         } Investigated these types: ToastAudioContent – an enum of different Win8 sound effects for toast notifications GlyphValue – an enum of different Win8 icons for badge notifications · Infrastructure\NotificationTemplateModelBinder.cs WNS Namespace references     using NotificationsExtensions.BadgeContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.RawContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.TileContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.ToastContent; Various NotificationFactory derived types can server as bindable models in MVC for creating INotificationContent types. Default values are also set for IWideTileNotificationContent & IToastNotificationContent. Type factoryType = null;             switch (notificationType)             {                 case "Badge":                     factoryType = typeof(BadgeContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Tile":                     factoryType = typeof(TileContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Toast":                     factoryType = typeof(ToastContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Raw":                     factoryType = typeof(RawContentFactory);                     break;             } Investigated these types: BadgeContentFactory – CreateBadgeGlyph, CreateBadgeNumeric (???) TileContentFactory – many notification content creation methods , apparently one for every tile layout type ToastContentFactory – many notification content creation methods , apparently one for every toast layout type RawContentFactory – passing strings WorkerRole WNS Namespace references using Notifications; using Notifications.WNS; using Windows.Samples.Notifications; OnStart() Method – on Worker Role startup, initialize the NotificationJobSerializer, the CloudQueue, and the WNSNotificationJobProcessor _notificationJobSerializer = new NotificationJobSerializer(); _cloudQueueClient = this.account.CreateCloudQueueClient(); _pushNotificationRequestsQueue = _cloudQueueClient.GetQueueReference(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("RequestQueueName")); _processor = new WNSNotificationJobProcessor(_notificationJobSerializer, _pushNotificationRequestsQueue); Run() Method – poll the Azure Queue for NotificationJobRequest messages & process them:   while (true)             { Trace.WriteLine("Checking for Messages", "Information"); try                 { Parallel.ForEach( this.pushNotificationRequestsQueue.GetMessages(this.batchSize), this.processor.ProcessJobMessageRequest);                 } catch (Exception e)                 { Trace.WriteLine(e.ToString(), "Error");                 } Trace.WriteLine(string.Format("Sleeping for {0} seconds", this.pollIntervalMiliseconds / 1000)); Thread.Sleep(this.pollIntervalMiliseconds);                                            } How I learned to appreciate Win8 There is really only one application architecture for Windows 8 apps: Metro client side and Azure backend – and that is a good thing. With WNS, tier integration is so automated that you don’t even have to leverage a HTTP push API such as SignalR. This is a pretty powerful development paradigm, and has changed the way I look at Windows 8 for RAD business apps. When I originally looked at Win8 and the WinRT API, my first opinion on Win8 dev was as follows – GOOD:WinRT, WRL, C++/CX, WinJS, XAML (& ease of Direct3D integration); BAD: low projected market penetration,.NET lobotomized (Only 8% of .NET 4.5 classes can be used in Win8 non-desktop apps - http://bit.ly/HRuJr7); UGLY:Metro pascal tiles! Perhaps my 80s teenage years gave me a punk reactionary sense of revulsion towards the Partridge Family 70s style that Metro UX seems to have appropriated: On second thought though, it simplifies UI dev to a single paradigm (although UX guys will need to change career) – you will not find an easier app dev environment. Speculation: If LightSwitch is going to support HTML5 client app generation, then its a safe guess to say that vnext will support Win8 Metro XAML - a much easier port from Silverlight XAML. Given the VS2012 LightSwitch integration as a thumbs up from the powers that be at MS, and given that Win8 C#/XAML Metro apps tend towards a streamlined 'golden straight-jacket' cookie cutter app dev style with an Azure back-end supporting Win8 push notifications... --> its easy to extrapolate than LightSwitch vnext could well be the Win8 Metro XAML to Azure RAD tool of choice! The hook is already there - :) Why else have the space next to the HTML Client box? This high level of application development abstraction will facilitate rapid app cookie-cutter architecture-infrastructure frameworks for wrapping any app. This will allow me to avoid too much XAML code-monkeying around & focus on my area of interest: Technical Computing.

  Read the article

• Using the Data Form Web Part (SharePoint 2010) Site Agnostically!

  - by David Jacobus

  Originally posted on: http://geekswithblogs.net/djacobus/archive/2013/10/24/154465.aspxAs a Developer whom has worked closely with web designers (Power users) in a SharePoint environment, I have come across the issue of making the Data Form Web Part reusable across the site collection! In SharePoint 2007 it was very easy and this blog pointed the way to make it happen: Josh Gaffey's Blog. In SharePoint 2010 something changed! This method failed except for using a Data Form Web Part that pointed to a list in the Site Collection Root! I am making this discussion relative to a developer whom creates a solution (WSP) with all the artifacts embedded and the user shouldn’t have any involvement in the process except to activate features. The Scenario: 1. A Power User creates a Data Form Web Part using SharePoint Designer 2010! It is a great web part the uses all the power of SharePoint Designer and XSLT (Conditional formatting, etc.). 2. Other Users in the site collection want to use that specific web part in sub sites in the site collection. Pointing to a list with the same name, not at the site collection root! The Issues: 1. The Data Form Web Part Data Source uses a List ID (GUID) to point to the specific list. Which means a list in a sub site will have a list with a new GUID different than the one which was created with SharePoint Designer! Obviously, the List needs to be the same List (Fields, Content Types, etc.) with different data. 2. How can we make this web part site agnostic, and dependent only on the lists Name? I had this problem come up over and over and decided to put my solution forward! The Solution: 1. Use the XSL of the Data Form Web Part Created By the Power User in SharePoint Designer! 2. Extend the OOTB Data Form Web Part to use this XSL and Point to a List by name. The solution points to a hybrid solution that requires some coding (Developer) and the XSL (Power User) artifacts put together in a Visual Studio SharePoint Solution. Here are the solution steps in summary: 1. Create an empty SharePoint project in Visual Studio 2. Create a Module and Feature and put the XSL file created by the Power User into it a. Scope the feature to web 3. Create a Feature Receiver to Create the List. The same list from which the Data Form Web Part was created with by the Power User. a. Scope the feature to web 4. Create a Web Part extending the Data Form Web a. Point the Data Form Web Part to point to the List by Name b. Point the Data Form Web Part XSL link to the XSL added using the Module feature c. Scope The feature to Site i. This is because all web parts are in the site collection web part gallery. So in a Narrative Summary: We are creating a list in code which has the same name and (site Columns) as the list from which the Power User created the Data Form Web Part Using SharePoint Designer. We are creating a Web Part in code which extends the OOTB Data Form Web Part to point to a list by name and use the XSL created by the Power User. Okay! Here are the steps with images and code! At the end of this post I will provide a link to the code for a solution which works in any site! I want to TOOT the HORN for the power of this solution! It is the mantra a use with all my clients! What is a basic skill a SharePoint Developer: Create an application that uses the data from a SharePoint list and make that data visible to the user in a manner which meets requirements! Create an Empty SharePoint 2010 Project Here I am naming my Project DJ.DataFormWebPart Create a Code Folder Copy and paste the Extension and Utilities classes (Found in the solution provided at the end of this post) Change the Namespace to match this project The List to which the Data Form Web Part which was used to make the XSL by the Power User in SharePoint Designer is now going to be created in code! If already in code, then all the better! Here I am going to create a list in the site collection root and add some data to it! For the purpose of this discussion I will actually create this list in code before using SharePoint Designer for simplicity! So here I create the List and deploy it within this solution before I do anything else. I will use a List I created before for demo purposes. Footer List is used within the footer of my master page. Add a new Feature: Here I name the Feature FooterList and add a Feature Event Receiver: Here is the code for the Event Receiver: I have a previous blog post about adding lists in code so I will not take time to narrate this code: using System; using System.Runtime.InteropServices; using System.Security.Permissions; using Microsoft.SharePoint; using DJ.DataFormWebPart.Code; namespace DJ.DataFormWebPart.Features.FooterList { /// <summary> /// This class handles events raised during feature activation, deactivation, installation, uninstallation, and upgrade. /// </summary> /// <remarks> /// The GUID attached to this class may be used during packaging and should not be modified. /// </remarks> [Guid("a58644fd-9209-41f4-aa16-67a53af7a9bf")] public class FooterListEventReceiver : SPFeatureReceiver { SPWeb currentWeb = null; SPSite currentSite = null; const string columnGroup = "DJ"; const string ctName = "FooterContentType"; // Uncomment the method below to handle the event raised after a feature has been activated. public override void FeatureActivated(SPFeatureReceiverProperties properties) { using (SPWeb spWeb = properties.GetWeb() as SPWeb) { using (SPSite site = new SPSite(spWeb.Site.ID)) { using (SPWeb rootWeb = site.OpenWeb(site.RootWeb.ID)) { //add the fields addFields(rootWeb); //add content type SPContentType testCT = rootWeb.ContentTypes[ctName]; // we will not create the content type if it exists if (testCT == null) { //the content type does not exist add it addContentType(rootWeb, ctName); } if ((spWeb.Lists.TryGetList("FooterList") == null)) { //create the list if it dosen't to exist CreateFooterList(spWeb, site); } } } } } #region ContentType public void addFields(SPWeb spWeb) { Utilities.addField(spWeb, "Link", SPFieldType.URL, false, columnGroup); Utilities.addField(spWeb, "Information", SPFieldType.Text, false, columnGroup); } private static void addContentType(SPWeb spWeb, string name) { SPContentType myContentType = new SPContentType(spWeb.ContentTypes["Item"], spWeb.ContentTypes, name) { Group = columnGroup }; spWeb.ContentTypes.Add(myContentType); addContentTypeLinkages(spWeb, myContentType); myContentType.Update(); } public static void addContentTypeLinkages(SPWeb spWeb, SPContentType ct) { Utilities.addContentTypeLink(spWeb, "Link", ct); Utilities.addContentTypeLink(spWeb, "Information", ct); } private void CreateFooterList(SPWeb web, SPSite site) { Guid newListGuid = web.Lists.Add("FooterList", "Footer List", SPListTemplateType.GenericList); SPList newList = web.Lists[newListGuid]; newList.ContentTypesEnabled = true; var footer = site.RootWeb.ContentTypes[ctName]; newList.ContentTypes.Add(footer); newList.ContentTypes.Delete(newList.ContentTypes["Item"].Id); newList.Update(); var view = newList.DefaultView; //add all view fields here //view.ViewFields.Add("NewsTitle"); view.ViewFields.Add("Link"); view.ViewFields.Add("Information"); view.Update(); } } } Basically created a content type with two site columns Link and Information. I had to change some code as we are working at the SPWeb level and need Content Types at the SPSite level! I’ll use a new Site Collection for this demo (Best Practice) keep old artifacts from impinging on development: Next we will add this list to the root of the site collection by deploying this solution, add some data and then use SharePoint Designer to create a Data Form Web Part. The list has been added, now let’s add some data: Okay let’s add a Data Form Web Part in SharePoint Designer. Create a new web part page in the site pages library: I will name it TestWP.aspx and edit it in advanced mode: Let’s add an empty Data Form Web Part to the web part zone: Click on the web part to add a data source: Choose FooterList in the Data Source menu: Choose appropriate fields and select insert as multiple item view: Here is what it look like after insertion: Let’s add some conditional formatting if the information filed is not blank: Choose Create (right side) apply formatting: Choose the Information Field and set the condition not null: Click Set Style: Here is the result: Okay! Not flashy but simple enough for this demo. Remember this is the job of the Power user! All we want from this web part is the XLS-Style Sheet out of SharePoint Designer. We are going to use it as the XSL for our web part which we will be creating next. Let’s add a web part to our project extending the OOTB Data Form Web Part. Add new item from the Visual Studio add menu: Choose Web Part: Change WebPart to DataFormWebPart (Oh well my namespace needs some improvement, but it will sure make it readily identifiable as an extended web part!) Below is the code for this web part: using System; using System.ComponentModel; using System.Web; using System.Web.UI; using System.Web.UI.WebControls; using System.Web.UI.WebControls.WebParts; using Microsoft.SharePoint; using Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls; using System.Text; namespace DJ.DataFormWebPart.DataFormWebPart { [ToolboxItemAttribute(false)] public class DataFormWebPart : Microsoft.SharePoint.WebPartPages.DataFormWebPart { protected override void OnInit(EventArgs e) { base.OnInit(e); this.ChromeType = PartChromeType.None; this.Title = "FooterListDF"; try { //SPSite site = SPContext.Current.Site; SPWeb web = SPContext.Current.Web; SPList list = web.Lists.TryGetList("FooterList"); if (list != null) { string queryList1 = "<Query><Where><IsNotNull><FieldRef Name='Title' /></IsNotNull></Where><OrderBy><FieldRef Name='Title' Ascending='True' /></OrderBy></Query>"; uint maximumRowList1 = 10; SPDataSource dataSourceList1 = GetDataSource(list.Title, web.Url, list, queryList1, maximumRowList1); this.DataSources.Add(dataSourceList1); this.XslLink = web.Url + "/Assests/Footer.xsl"; this.ParameterBindings = BuildDataFormParameters(); this.DataBind(); } } catch (Exception ex) { this.Controls.Add(new LiteralControl("ERROR: " + ex.Message)); } } private SPDataSource GetDataSource(string dataSourceId, string webUrl, SPList list, string query, uint maximumRow) { SPDataSource dataSource = new SPDataSource(); dataSource.UseInternalName = true; dataSource.ID = dataSourceId; dataSource.DataSourceMode = SPDataSourceMode.List; dataSource.List = list; dataSource.SelectCommand = "" + query + ""; Parameter listIdParam = new Parameter("ListID"); listIdParam.DefaultValue = list.ID.ToString( "B").ToUpper(); Parameter maximumRowsParam = new Parameter("MaximumRows"); maximumRowsParam.DefaultValue = maximumRow.ToString(); QueryStringParameter rootFolderParam = new QueryStringParameter("RootFolder", "RootFolder"); dataSource.SelectParameters.Add(listIdParam); dataSource.SelectParameters.Add(maximumRowsParam); dataSource.SelectParameters.Add(rootFolderParam); dataSource.UpdateParameters.Add(listIdParam); dataSource.DeleteParameters.Add(listIdParam); dataSource.InsertParameters.Add(listIdParam); return dataSource; } private string BuildDataFormParameters() { StringBuilder parameters = new StringBuilder("<ParameterBindings><ParameterBinding Name=\"dvt_apos\" Location=\"Postback;Connection\"/><ParameterBinding Name=\"UserID\" Location=\"CAMLVariable\" DefaultValue=\"CurrentUserName\"/><ParameterBinding Name=\"Today\" Location=\"CAMLVariable\" DefaultValue=\"CurrentDate\"/>"); parameters.Append("<ParameterBinding Name=\"dvt_firstrow\" Location=\"Postback;Connection\"/>"); parameters.Append("<ParameterBinding Name=\"dvt_nextpagedata\" Location=\"Postback;Connection\"/>"); parameters.Append("<ParameterBinding Name=\"dvt_adhocmode\" Location=\"Postback;Connection\"/>"); parameters.Append("<ParameterBinding Name=\"dvt_adhocfiltermode\" Location=\"Postback;Connection\"/>"); parameters.Append("</ParameterBindings>"); return parameters.ToString(); } } } The OnInit method we use to set the list name and the XSL Link property of the Data Form Web Part. We do not have the link to XSL in our Solution so we will add the XSL now: Add a Module in the Visual Studio add menu: Rename Sample.txt in the module to footer.xsl and then copy the XSL from SharePoint Designer Look at elements.xml to where the footer.xsl is being provisioned to which is Assets/footer.xsl, make sure the Web parts xsl link is pointing to this url: Okay we are good to go! Let’s check our features and package: DataFormWebPart should be scoped to site and have the web part: The Footer List feature should be scoped to web and have the Assets module (Okay, I see, a spelling issue but it won’t affect this demo) If everything is correct we should be able to click a couple of sub site feature activations and have our list and web part in a sub site. (In fact this solution can be activated anywhere) Here is the list created at SubSite1 with new data It. Next let’s add the web part on a test page and see if it works as expected: It does! So we now have a repeatable way to use a WSP to move a Data Form Web Part around our sites! Here is a link to the code: DataFormWebPart Solution

  Read the article

• A Communication System for XAML Applications

  - by psheriff

  In any application, you want to keep the coupling between any two or more objects as loose as possible. Coupling happens when one class contains a property that is used in another class, or uses another class in one of its methods. If you have this situation, then this is called strong or tight coupling. One popular design pattern to help with keeping objects loosely coupled is called the Mediator design pattern. The basics of this pattern are very simple; avoid one object directly talking to another object, and instead use another class to mediate between the two. As with most of my blog posts, the purpose is to introduce you to a simple approach to using a message broker, not all of the fine details. IPDSAMessageBroker Interface As with most implementations of a design pattern, you typically start with an interface or an abstract base class. In this particular instance, an Interface will work just fine. The interface for our Message Broker class just contains a single method “SendMessage” and one event “MessageReceived”. public delegate void MessageReceivedEventHandler( object sender, PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e); public interface IPDSAMessageBroker{  void SendMessage(PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg);   event MessageReceivedEventHandler MessageReceived;} PDSAMessageBrokerMessage Class As you can see in the interface, the SendMessage method requires a type of PDSAMessageBrokerMessage to be passed to it. This class simply has a MessageName which is a ‘string’ type and a MessageBody property which is of the type ‘object’ so you can pass whatever you want in the body. You might pass a string in the body, or a complete Customer object. The MessageName property will help the receiver of the message know what is in the MessageBody property. public class PDSAMessageBrokerMessage{  public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage()  {  }   public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage(string name, object body)  {    MessageName = name;    MessageBody = body;  }   public string MessageName { get; set; }   public object MessageBody { get; set; }} PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs Class As our message broker class will be raising an event that others can respond to, it is a good idea to create your own event argument class. This class will inherit from the System.EventArgs class and add a couple of additional properties. The properties are the MessageName and Message. The MessageName property is simply a string value. The Message property is a type of a PDSAMessageBrokerMessage class. public class PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs : EventArgs{  public PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs()  {  }   public PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs(string name,     PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg)  {    MessageName = name;    Message = msg;  }   public string MessageName { get; set; }   public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage Message { get; set; }} PDSAMessageBroker Class Now that you have an interface class and a class to pass a message through an event, it is time to create your actual PDSAMessageBroker class. This class implements the SendMessage method and will also create the event handler for the delegate created in your Interface. public class PDSAMessageBroker : IPDSAMessageBroker{  public void SendMessage(PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg)  {    PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs args;     args = new PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs(      msg.MessageName, msg);     RaiseMessageReceived(args);  }   public event MessageReceivedEventHandler MessageReceived;   protected void RaiseMessageReceived(    PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e)  {    if (null != MessageReceived)      MessageReceived(this, e);  }} The SendMessage method will take a PDSAMessageBrokerMessage object as an argument. It then creates an instance of a PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs class, passing to the constructor two items: the MessageName from the PDSAMessageBrokerMessage object and also the object itself. It may seem a little redundant to pass in the message name when that same message name is part of the message, but it does make consuming the event and checking for the message name a little cleaner – as you will see in the next section. Create a Global Message Broker In your WPF application, create an instance of this message broker class in the App class located in the App.xaml file. Create a public property in the App class and create a new instance of that class in the OnStartUp event procedure as shown in the following code: public partial class App : Application{  public PDSAMessageBroker MessageBroker { get; set; }   protected override void OnStartup(StartupEventArgs e)  {    base.OnStartup(e);     MessageBroker = new PDSAMessageBroker();  }} Sending and Receiving Messages Let’s assume you have a user control that you load into a control on your main window and you want to send a message from that user control to the main window. You might have the main window display a message box, or put a string into a status bar as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1: The main window can receive and send messages The first thing you do in the main window is to hook up an event procedure to the MessageReceived event of the global message broker. This is done in the constructor of the main window: public MainWindow(){  InitializeComponent();   (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.     MessageReceived += new MessageReceivedEventHandler(       MessageBroker_MessageReceived);} One piece of code you might not be familiar with is accessing a property defined in the App class of your XAML application. Within the App.Xaml file is a class named App that inherits from the Application object. You access the global instance of this App class by using Application.Current. You cast Application.Current to ‘App’ prior to accessing any of the public properties or methods you defined in the App class. Thus, the code (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker, allows you to get at the MessageBroker property defined in the App class. In the MessageReceived event procedure in the main window (shown below) you can now check to see if the MessageName property of the PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs is equal to “StatusBar” and if it is, then display the message body into the status bar text block control. void MessageBroker_MessageReceived(object sender,   PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e){  switch (e.MessageName)  {    case "StatusBar":      tbStatus.Text = e.Message.MessageBody.ToString();      break;  }} In the Page 1 user control’s Loaded event procedure you will send the message “StatusBar” through the global message broker to any listener using the following code: private void UserControl_Loaded(object sender,  RoutedEventArgs e){  // Send Status Message  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.    SendMessage(new PDSAMessageBrokerMessage("StatusBar",      "This is Page 1"));} Since the main window is listening for the message ‘StatusBar’, it will display the value “This is Page 1” in the status bar at the bottom of the main window. Sending a Message to a User Control The previous example sent a message from the user control to the main window. You can also send messages from the main window to any listener as well. Remember that the global message broker is really just a broadcaster to anyone who has hooked into the MessageReceived event. In the constructor of the user control named ucPage1 you can hook into the global message broker’s MessageReceived event. You can then listen for any messages that are sent to this control by using a similar switch-case structure like that in the main window. public ucPage1(){  InitializeComponent();   // Hook to the Global Message Broker  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.    MessageReceived += new MessageReceivedEventHandler(      MessageBroker_MessageReceived);} void MessageBroker_MessageReceived(object sender,  PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e){  // Look for messages intended for Page 1  switch (e.MessageName)  {    case "ForPage1":      MessageBox.Show(e.Message.MessageBody.ToString());      break;  }} Once the ucPage1 user control has been loaded into the main window you can then send a message using the following code: private void btnSendToPage1_Click(object sender,  RoutedEventArgs e){  PDSAMessageBrokerMessage arg =     new PDSAMessageBrokerMessage();   arg.MessageName = "ForPage1";  arg.MessageBody = "Message For Page 1";   // Send a message to Page 1  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.SendMessage(arg);} Since the MessageName matches what is in the ucPage1 MessageReceived event procedure, ucPage1 can do anything in response to that event. It is important to note that when the message gets sent it is sent to all MessageReceived event procedures, not just the one that is looking for a message called “ForPage1”. If the user control ucPage1 is not loaded and this message is broadcast, but no other code is listening for it, then it is simply ignored. Remove Event Handler In each class where you add an event handler to the MessageReceived event you need to make sure to remove those event handlers when you are done. Failure to do so can cause a strong reference to the class and thus not allow that object to be garbage collected. In each of your user control’s make sure in the Unloaded event to remove the event handler. private void UserControl_Unloaded(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e){  if (_MessageBroker != null)    _MessageBroker.MessageReceived -=         _MessageBroker_MessageReceived;} Problems with Message Brokering As with most “global” classes or classes that hook up events to other classes, garbage collection is something you need to consider. Just the simple act of hooking up an event procedure to a global event handler creates a reference between your user control and the message broker in the App class. This means that even when your user control is removed from your UI, the class will still be in memory because of the reference to the message broker. This can cause messages to still being handled even though the UI is not being displayed. It is up to you to make sure you remove those event handlers as discussed in the previous section. If you don’t, then the garbage collector cannot release those objects. Instead of using events to send messages from one object to another you might consider registering your objects with a central message broker. This message broker now becomes a collection class into which you pass an object and what messages that object wishes to receive. You do end up with the same problem however. You have to un-register your objects; otherwise they still stay in memory. To alleviate this problem you can look into using the WeakReference class as a method to store your objects so they can be garbage collected if need be. Discussing Weak References is beyond the scope of this post, but you can look this up on the web. Summary In this blog post you learned how to create a simple message broker system that will allow you to send messages from one object to another without having to reference objects directly. This does reduce the coupling between objects in your application. You do need to remember to get rid of any event handlers prior to your objects going out of scope or you run the risk of having memory leaks and events being called even though you can no longer access the object that is responding to that event. NOTE: You can download the sample code for this article by visiting my website at http://www.pdsa.com/downloads. Select “Tips & Tricks”, then select “A Communication System for XAML Applications” from the drop down list.

  Read the article

• Metro Walkthrough: Creating a Task List with a ListView and IndexedDB

  - by Stephen.Walther

  The goal of this blog entry is to describe how you can work with data in a Metro style application written with JavaScript. In particular, we create a super simple Task List application which enables you to create and delete tasks. Here’s a video which demonstrates how the Task List application works: In order to build this application, I had to take advantage of several features of the WinJS library and technologies including: IndexedDB – The Task List application stores data in an IndexedDB database. HTML5 Form Validation – The Task List application uses HTML5 validation to ensure that a required field has a value. ListView Control – The Task List application displays the tasks retrieved from the IndexedDB database in a WinJS ListView control. Creating the IndexedDB Database The Task List application stores all of its data in an IndexedDB database named TasksDB. This database is opened/created with the following code: var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; The msIndexedDB.open() method accepts two parameters: the name of the database to open and the version of the database to open. If a database with a matching version already exists, then calling the msIndexedDB.open() method opens a connection to the existing database. If the database does not exist then the upgradeneeded event is raised. You handle the upgradeneeded event to create a new database. In the code above, the upgradeneeded event handler creates an object store named “tasks” (An object store roughly corresponds to a database table). When you add items to the tasks object store then each item gets an id property with an auto-incremented value automatically. The code above also includes an error event handler. If the IndexedDB database cannot be opened or created, for whatever reason, then an error message is written to the Visual Studio JavaScript Console window. Displaying a List of Tasks The TaskList application retrieves its list of tasks from the tasks object store, which we created above, and displays the list of tasks in a ListView control. Here is how the ListView control is declared: <div id="tasksListView" data-win-control="WinJS.UI.ListView" data-win-options="{ itemDataSource: TaskList.tasks.dataSource, itemTemplate: select('#taskTemplate'), tapBehavior: 'toggleSelect', selectionMode: 'multi', layout: { type: WinJS.UI.ListLayout } }"> </div> The ListView control is bound to the TaskList.tasks.dataSource data source. The TaskList.tasks.dataSource is created with the following code: // Create the data source var tasks = new WinJS.Binding.List(); // Open the database var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; // Load the data source with data from the database req.onsuccess = function () { db = req.result; var tran = db.transaction("tasks"); tran.objectStore("tasks").openCursor().onsuccess = function(event) { var cursor = event.target.result; tasks.dataSource.beginEdits(); if (cursor) { tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, cursor.value); cursor.continue(); } else { tasks.dataSource.endEdits(); }; }; }; // Expose the data source and functions WinJS.Namespace.define("TaskList", { tasks: tasks }); Notice the success event handler. This handler is called when a database is successfully opened/created. In the code above, all of the items from the tasks object store are retrieved into a cursor and added to a WinJS.Binding.List object named tasks. Because the ListView control is bound to the WinJS.Binding.List object, copying the tasks from the object store into the WinJS.Binding.List object causes the tasks to appear in the ListView: Adding a New Task You add a new task in the Task List application by entering the title of a new task into an HTML form and clicking the Add button. Here’s the markup for creating the form: <form id="addTaskForm"> <input id="newTaskTitle" title="New Task" required /> <button>Add</button> </form> Notice that the INPUT element includes a required attribute. In a Metro application, you can take advantage of HTML5 Validation to validate form fields. If you don’t enter a value for the newTaskTitle field then the following validation error message is displayed: For a brief introduction to HTML5 validation, see my previous blog entry: http://stephenwalther.com/blog/archive/2012/03/13/html5-form-validation.aspx When you click the Add button, the form is submitted and the form submit event is raised. The following code is executed in the default.js file: // Handle Add Task document.getElementById("addTaskForm").addEventListener("submit", function (evt) { evt.preventDefault(); var newTaskTitle = document.getElementById("newTaskTitle"); TaskList.addTask({ title: newTaskTitle.value }); newTaskTitle.value = ""; }); The code above retrieves the title of the new task and calls the addTask() method in the tasks.js file. Here’s the code for the addTask() method which is responsible for actually adding the new task to the IndexedDB database: // Add a new task function addTask(taskToAdd) { var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", IDBTransaction.READ_WRITE); var addRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").add(taskToAdd); addRequest.onsuccess = function (evt) { taskToAdd.id = evt.target.result; tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, taskToAdd); } } The code above does two things. First, it adds the new task to the tasks object store in the IndexedDB database. Second, it adds the new task to the data source bound to the ListView. The dataSource.insertAtEnd() method is called to add the new task to the data source so the new task will appear in the ListView (with a nice little animation). Deleting Existing Tasks The Task List application enables you to select one or more tasks by clicking or tapping on one or more tasks in the ListView. When you click the Delete button, the selected tasks are removed from both the IndexedDB database and the ListView. For example, in the following screenshot, two tasks are selected. The selected tasks appear with a teal background and a checkmark: When you click the Delete button, the following code in the default.js file is executed: // Handle Delete Tasks document.getElementById("btnDeleteTasks").addEventListener("click", function (evt) { tasksListView.winControl.selection.getItems().then(function(items) { items.forEach(function (item) { TaskList.deleteTask(item); }); }); }); The selected tasks are retrieved with the TaskList selection.getItem() method. In the code above, the deleteTask() method is called for each of the selected tasks. Here’s the code for the deleteTask() method: // Delete an existing task function deleteTask(listViewItem) { // Database key != ListView key var dbKey = listViewItem.data.id; var listViewKey = listViewItem.key; // Remove item from db and, if success, remove item from ListView var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", IDBTransaction.READ_WRITE); var deleteRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").delete(dbKey); deleteRequest.onsuccess = function () { tasks.dataSource.remove(listViewKey); } } This code does two things: it deletes the existing task from the database and removes the existing task from the ListView. In both cases, the right task is removed by using the key associated with the task. However, the task key is different in the case of the database and in the case of the ListView. In the case of the database, the task key is the value of the task id property. In the case of the ListView, on the other hand, the task key is auto-generated by the ListView. When the task is removed from the ListView, an animation is used to collapse the tasks which appear above and below the task which was removed. The Complete Code Above, I did a lot of jumping around between different files in the application and I left out sections of code. For the sake of completeness, I want to include the entire code here: the default.html, default.js, and tasks.js files. Here are the contents of the default.html file. This file contains the UI for the Task List application: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <meta charset="utf-8"> <title>Task List</title> <!-- WinJS references --> <link href="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/css/ui-dark.css" rel="stylesheet"> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/js/base.js"></script> <script src="//Microsoft.WinJS.0.6/js/ui.js"></script> <!-- TaskList references --> <link href="/css/default.css" rel="stylesheet"> <script src="/js/default.js"></script> <script type="text/javascript" src="js/tasks.js"></script> <style type="text/css"> body { font-size: x-large; } form { display: inline; } #appContainer { margin: 20px; width: 600px; } .win-container { padding: 10px; } </style> </head> <body> <div> <!-- Templates --> <div id="taskTemplate" data-win-control="WinJS.Binding.Template"> <div> <span data-win-bind="innerText:title"></span> </div> </div> <h1>Super Task List</h1> <div id="appContainer"> <form id="addTaskForm"> <input id="newTaskTitle" title="New Task" required /> <button>Add</button> </form> <button id="btnDeleteTasks">Delete</button> <div id="tasksListView" data-win-control="WinJS.UI.ListView" data-win-options="{ itemDataSource: TaskList.tasks.dataSource, itemTemplate: select('#taskTemplate'), tapBehavior: 'toggleSelect', selectionMode: 'multi', layout: { type: WinJS.UI.ListLayout } }"> </div> </div> </div> </body> </html> Here is the code for the default.js file. This code wires up the Add Task form and Delete button: (function () { "use strict"; var app = WinJS.Application; app.onactivated = function (eventObject) { if (eventObject.detail.kind === Windows.ApplicationModel.Activation.ActivationKind.launch) { WinJS.UI.processAll().then(function () { // Get reference to Tasks ListView var tasksListView = document.getElementById("tasksListView"); // Handle Add Task document.getElementById("addTaskForm").addEventListener("submit", function (evt) { evt.preventDefault(); var newTaskTitle = document.getElementById("newTaskTitle"); TaskList.addTask({ title: newTaskTitle.value }); newTaskTitle.value = ""; }); // Handle Delete Tasks document.getElementById("btnDeleteTasks").addEventListener("click", function (evt) { tasksListView.winControl.selection.getItems().then(function(items) { items.forEach(function (item) { TaskList.deleteTask(item); }); }); }); }); } }; app.start(); })(); Finally, here is the tasks.js file. This file contains all of the code for opening, creating, and interacting with IndexedDB: (function () { "use strict"; // Create the data source var tasks = new WinJS.Binding.List(); // Open the database var db; var req = window.msIndexedDB.open("TasksDB", 1); req.onerror = function () { console.log("Could not open database"); }; req.onupgradeneeded = function (evt) { var newDB = evt.target.result; newDB.createObjectStore("tasks", { keyPath: "id", autoIncrement:true }); }; // Load the data source with data from the database req.onsuccess = function () { db = req.result; var tran = db.transaction("tasks"); tran.objectStore("tasks").openCursor().onsuccess = function(event) { var cursor = event.target.result; tasks.dataSource.beginEdits(); if (cursor) { tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, cursor.value); cursor.continue(); } else { tasks.dataSource.endEdits(); }; }; }; // Add a new task function addTask(taskToAdd) { var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", IDBTransaction.READ_WRITE); var addRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").add(taskToAdd); addRequest.onsuccess = function (evt) { taskToAdd.id = evt.target.result; tasks.dataSource.insertAtEnd(null, taskToAdd); } } // Delete an existing task function deleteTask(listViewItem) { // Database key != ListView key var dbKey = listViewItem.data.id; var listViewKey = listViewItem.key; // Remove item from db and, if success, remove item from ListView var transaction = db.transaction("tasks", IDBTransaction.READ_WRITE); var deleteRequest = transaction.objectStore("tasks").delete(dbKey); deleteRequest.onsuccess = function () { tasks.dataSource.remove(listViewKey); } } // Expose the data source and functions WinJS.Namespace.define("TaskList", { tasks: tasks, addTask: addTask, deleteTask: deleteTask }); })(); Summary I wrote this blog entry because I wanted to create a walkthrough of building a simple database-driven application. In particular, I wanted to demonstrate how you can use a ListView control with an IndexedDB database to store and retrieve database data.

  Read the article

< Previous Page | 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455  | Next Page >